JP2020018725A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability in which a lottery result of a jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot from among mutually different plural jackpot probabilities, and can display a figure of a non-setting value corresponding to a jackpot probability in those other than a setting value corresponding to the set jackpot probability on a 7-segment display part 39 in an ending of a jackpot game according to the number of game balls 99 (the number of special out balls) entering a special out ball port 373 in an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. In the ending of a jackpot game, a figure corresponding to a setting value is not displaying on the 7-segment display part 39.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of set values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery.

JP-A-2000-024234

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the degree of interest and interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in a game and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
With
In the prescribed period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

FIG. 1 is an exemplary perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening / closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, a clune apparatus, and a game ball retention part. FIG. FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 6. The 7-segment display unit displays a specific period in which game balls stay in the game ball staying unit, a predetermined period in which the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. The figure for demonstrating a regulation period. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10B and 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of alphabet display on a 7-segment display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control apparatus typically. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the set value display part of a performance information display apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 21. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main process executed by the main control device. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update processing of FIG. 28. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a numeric display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a view showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40. The figure for demonstrating the 7-segment display part control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a control example of a segment display unit and an update example of a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. The figure for explaining the example of control of a 7 segment display part. The figure for demonstrating the update example of a 7 segment display part control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending effect of the big hit game. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an ending addition image control process performed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 52 is a view showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51. FIG. 13 is an exemplary perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 53. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. 9 is a table showing a relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. The figure which shows the example of a screen shift in the symbol display part in a standby state. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen shift process of FIG. 62. The front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. The figure which shows the example of turning on and off in a lamp display part. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The figure for demonstrating the example of an update of the 7-segment display part control information storage area set to a sound lamp control apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of a screen shift in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a big hit game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the ending effect of the big hit game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part.

  Hereinafter, the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, the following embodiments are merely examples embodying the present invention and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, rear, left and right and up and down used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. When the outer frame 14 is fixed, it is installed in a game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jing-ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention is applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation performed on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a variable game production performed in a variable game in which a lottery result in a jackpot lottery is clearly displayed to the player. Is operated to execute an operation button effect.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the position in front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the position can be operated by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation of the touch key by a player is provided instead of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected on the operation button effect and the like.

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated by the player, the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32 is controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, and stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described below, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows a player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform a sound output effect of outputting sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. In addition, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a blinking state such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of Inner Frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. In FIG. 2, the illustration on the game board 31 is omitted for simplicity of illustration.

  The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a clune device 37, a game ball staying section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board of the game board 31. After being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 is sent to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. To guide. The ball feeder 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that fires the game ball supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the game board 31. Note that the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires game balls using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings penetrating the gaming board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entrance of a game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. The game balls that have passed through the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the opening of the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, so that an out ball sensor 318a to be described later. (See FIG. 12). In addition, the variable winning opening 316 is provided at the right central portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 can enter the ball. The game ball that has passed through the penetrating portion 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the clown device 37 by a guiding path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the gaming board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched into the right area of the gaming board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and the second winning port is triggered by the detection of the passing of the game ball in the through gate 317. A normal winning lottery for determining whether to release 315 is executed.

  The incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the outgoing ball sensor 318a, and the special outgoing ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the outgoing ball sensor 318a, and the special outgoing sensor are provided. The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the game balls in accordance with the detection results of the ball input sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entering of a game ball by the entering sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out-balls based on the detection result of the out-ball sensor 318a. The number of out-balls counted here matches the number of launched game balls hit on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

  Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) determines that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered a special out ball port 373 of the below-described cloon device 37. The special out-of-ball detection command shown is set, and this special out-of-ball detection command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

  The ball sensors 313a to 317a, the ball sensor 318a, and the special ball sensor 384 are, for example, proximity sensors of an electromagnetic induction type, but can separately detect ball entry of a game ball by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electrically-powered accessory (electric winning) 315b for switching whether or not the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315 is restricted. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the gaming board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b enables the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction on a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316. The door 319 is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 319 allows game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 319 limits the entry of gaming balls to the variable winning opening 316. You. The opening / closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the big hit game, and otherwise stands by at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed. As a result, the variable winning opening 316 can receive a game ball 99 that has been launched in the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening and closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening / closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position. . Thus, when the door 319 is in the operating position, it can receive the game ball 99 that is launched in the right area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling off the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the gaming balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 has a penetrating portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guiding path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the up-down direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the clune device 37 via the penetrating portion 316b and the guiding path 316c. Note that a ball entry sensor 316a is provided on the guide path 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the variable winning opening 316 is detected when passing through the penetrating portion 316b and being introduced into the taxiway 316c. The ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entering ball sensor 314a or the entering ball sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The result of the lottery by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the result of the lottery.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of a game ball to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  When a game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R regular jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the variable winning opening 316 receives a maximum of (for example, 9) or more game balls winning. This is a game state including an open / close execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability change jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the 5R jackpot game state, and the 5R jackpot game state can be expected. This is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visually recognizable through an opening 31 </ b> A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a variation display effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to a lottery result in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315. , And various image effects such as a variable game effect performed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the variation display effect of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is achieved by scrolling a plurality of decorative symbols with numbers “1” to “9” sequentially in a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, an oblique direction, and the like. Done. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the decorative designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decoration designs from "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, after the predetermined variable display time elapses from the start of the symbol variable display in the symbol display unit 341, the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed so that the variation of all the decoration symbols is stopped. Is done. More specifically, in the variation display of the decorative symbols, first, all the decorative symbols fluctuate along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, or the like), and the variation of the plurality of decorative symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display of the decorative symbols ends.

  When the variation display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the decorative symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability change big hit", "16R probability change big hit" or "5R normal big hit", a state in which decorative symbols of the same type are arranged in the activated line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a big hit. Is done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by a combination of decorative symbols in the activated line, but is not always specified. More specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, a state where the symbol combination of, for example, “777” set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability change hit among the decorative symbols is arranged in the active line Is displayed, or a state is displayed in which the same decorative pattern combinations other than “777” are arranged in the active line. When the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, a state is displayed in which the symbol combinations such as “333” set in advance as the symbol combination indicating the 5R probability change jackpot are arranged in the active line. Or, a state is displayed in which the same decorative symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating the 16R probability change jackpot or the 5R probability change hit such as “777” or “333” are arranged in the active line. When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a decorative symbol indicating a probable big hit such as “222” or “444” is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the decorative symbols. A state is displayed in which the same decorative symbol combinations are arranged in the activated line. When the lottery result is “missing”, a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols are arranged in an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, together with the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable game. When the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the decorative symbol combination indicating the 16R probability change jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the variable game effect is 5R probability change jackpot. Alternatively, a suggestion effect indicating that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, if the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the decorative symbol combination indicating the probable jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the variable game effect is a 5R regular jackpot. Is performed. In this case, in the big hit game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R certain change big hit is executed.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  The gaming board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Thus, when an attempt is made to guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 using a magnet, the illegal operation can be detected. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Accordingly, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cloon device 37 transfers the game ball entered into the variable winning opening 316 to one of a normal out opening 378 and a special out opening 373 described later (see FIGS. 7 and 8). It is something to sort. Here, FIG. 6 is a view showing an example of the opening / closing door 319, the cloon device 37 and the game ball retaining portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the clune device 37, and FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the clune device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 has a circular shape in a plan view, and includes a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

  The high bottom portion 371a constitutes a right side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined downward and to the right. A special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball mouth 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to a lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball staying portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to a lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game balls 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retaining portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

  Note that the first guide member 375 can have a function of retaining the game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining section 38. By the way, in the present embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-setting value which is a game setting value other than the setting value which is a game setting value set in the gaming machine 10 is set in a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). The 7-segment display unit 39 is presented based on the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period) that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37. In the present embodiment, since the number of segments in the seven-segment display unit 39 is seven (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably specified by the seven pieces of information. Further, since the game setting values are in six stages from 1 to 6, there are five non-setting values, and therefore all non-setting values can be specified by 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces (specified number) of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball staying section 38 be configured so that a specified number or more of game balls 99 can stay in a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the gaming ball retaining section 38 to retain a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls 99. In this case, by giving the function of storing the game balls 99 to the first guide member 375, the number of the game balls 99 that is difficult only by the game ball staying portion 38 is retained using the first guide member 375. be able to. As a result, it becomes possible for the specified number or more of the game balls 99 to stay in the specific period, and information necessary for specifying all the non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. Accordingly, due to the arrangement of the various members, it is difficult for the first guiding member 375 to have the function of retaining the game balls 99, as well as the game ball retaining portion 38, so that a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 are retained. In such a case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it becomes possible to cause a certain number or more of the game balls 99 to stay. As a result, it becomes possible for the specified number or more of the game balls 99 to stay in the specified period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values may be presented.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limited number of the game balls 99 to stay in the specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limited number to the specified number (to make the limited number match the specified number). In this case, for example, when information (individual information of specific information) of a number corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is presented, all non-set values are set in one specific period. May be presented. In addition, when information of the number of game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball opening 373, for example, the number of information corresponding to the number of the lottery, is presented, the lottery is won. Information on the expected number according to the probability is presented, and since the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that not all the information necessary to specify all non-set values will be presented There is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the ball-in of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low) In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game at the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

  As a means for providing a limited number of the game balls 99 to be retained in the specific period, for example, a configuration in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, the first guiding member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. When a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game balls 99 near the special out ball opening 373 (by generating a ball jam), a special ball is generated. It is conceivable to restrict the game balls 99 from entering the out ball passage 374. According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period to a limited number by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complicated configuration or control.

  On the other hand, the game ball staying section 38 has a staying lane 381 inclined downward and left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the staying lane 381 in the game ball staying portion 38. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. For this reason, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 cannot be expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special). At the time when it is detected by the out-ball sensor 384), it is treated as an out-ball.

  The lower bottom portion 371b forms a left side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out port 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered the ball through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having an opening area larger than that of the special out ball hole 373. Is formed. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, similarly to the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

  As described above, the game balls 99 that are punched into the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening / closing door 319 are guided to such a cloon device 37 by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the clown device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game balls 99 in the cloon device 37 is delayed. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 usually have an out ball hole due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy and a collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the clown device 37 and other game balls 99. Enters 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal ball-out 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the ball-out sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371 has its moving direction changed due to, for example, the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or a collision with another game ball, and enters the special out ball 373. I do. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is discharged toward the game ball retaining portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

  Here, the probability that the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 will enter the special out port 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. . In other words, the expected number of balls to enter the special out ball opening 373 per round game of 10R is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the ball entry probability or the expected ball entry number in such a range, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified early for the player, but to specify the set value realistically. Will be possible. This prevents the game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the setting value is specified early, for example, when the setting value is low, and prevents the gaming machine from being bored due to the inability to specify the setting value. It is possible to prevent the game at 10 from being terminated.

  In this embodiment, the special out port 373 is provided in the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out port 378 has a larger opening area than the special out port 373. Although the game ball 99 is significantly less likely to enter the ball than the normal out hole 378, the game ball can be inserted into the special out hole 373 by other means instead of or in addition to all or a part of them. It is also conceivable that 99 will be difficult to enter. For example, it is conceivable to provide a means for inhibiting the game ball 99 from entering the special out port 373 around the special out port 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall surrounding the special out port 373 that prevents the ball from entering the special out port 373, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force repelling the game ball 99 around the special out port 373. Means for generating a force, and means for forming an air curtain by jetting air around the special out port 373 may be considered.

  Further, an opening / closing unit for opening / closing the special out port 373 may be provided so that it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the special out port 373. In this case, the special out port 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out port 378, and the normal out port 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out port 373. Is also good.

  The distributing means for distributing the game balls 99 entered into the variable winning port 316 to the normal out port 378 and the special out port 373 is not limited to the cloon device 37, but may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member or a rotating member such as a switching valve, or a nail driven into the game board 31, the normal out port 378 and the special out port 373 may be distributed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball staying unit 38 receives a game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 and stays the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. It is. Then, after the elapse of the specific period, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display section 39 described later are controlled, and according to the accumulated number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 until the predetermined period elapses, A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows a specific period in which game balls stay in the game ball staying portion, a predetermined period in which the number of game balls entering the special out ball of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. It is a figure for explaining a specified period displayed on a 7 segment display part.

  In the following, referring to FIG. 9, a specific period is set as a period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining unit 38, and a predetermined period is set for the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37. As a period in which the number is cumulatively counted, the “specified period” is all or a number (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period. A part of the period will be described as being displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, the “specific period” is not limited to the period in which the game balls 99 stay in the game ball staying unit 38, and the “predetermined period” is the cloon device. The present invention is not limited to a period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the 37 special out-ball holes 373 is counted cumulatively. That is, the “specific period”, “predetermined period”, and “prescribed period” include at least the period described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B), during a specific period in which the game balls 99 stay in the game ball staying section 38, the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game starts after the jackpot game (opening) is started. A specific period is set for each jackpot game started during a predetermined period until the end (ending of the ending starts). That is, the beginning of the specific period is a point in time when the jackpot game is started, and the end of the specific period is a point in time when the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is ended (a point at which ending is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the initial hit is a normal jackpot and a single hit), the jackpot game is started during a specific period. To the end of the big hit game opening / closing execution mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the winning in the variable probability jackpot in the low probability mode (when the initial hit is the variable jackpot and the jackpot casino is started), when the large jackpot is won in the high probability mode. For all the jackpot games executed before the jackpot game ends by the normal jackpot game, the period from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is specified. Set as a period. That is, in the jackpot casino, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games executed in the jackpot casino.

  In other words, regardless of the type of the jackpot or the winning timing, the number of game balls 99 corresponding to the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period of one jackpot game, as described later, is 7 The segments A to G of the segment display unit 39 are controlled to be turned on and off in the ending in the jackpot game, which is a specified period. In other words, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set for the gaming machine 10 will be a big hit based on the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period. Are set as a period for displaying a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) defining the above on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  When the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 in a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set for the gaming machine 10 is performed. The display order set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36 described later is a number that specifies a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit. Accordingly, one is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period in the jackpot game. In the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period in the jackpot game, the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 in the specific period of one big hit game is 14 in the seven-segment display unit 39. When the number is not more than 20 and two numbers for specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in an order according to the display order, and when the number is 21 or more and less than 28, a plurality of non-set values are specified. Three numbers to be displayed are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, If the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in an order according to the display order. In the case where the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is less than 7, the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period in the jackpot game is performed. The segment display unit 39 does not display any number specifying a plurality of non-set values.

  In this manner, in the gaming machine 10, every time a jackpot game is executed, a seven-segment display unit 39 described later is performed based on the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period. Can display one to five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values, and the set values can be specified by displaying five numbers specifying the non-set values. For example, when the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to specify that the game setting value 1 is a non-setting value, and when the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting value is displayed. 2 can be specified as a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, so that the game set value 3 can be specified as a non-set value. 4 indicates that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value, and indicates that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 5 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It is possible to specify that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. In addition, since the five non-set values are specified as the game setting values 2 to 6 by displaying the five numbers 2 to 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is determined that the setting value is the game setting value 1. it can. Similarly, by displaying five numbers of 1, 3 to 6 on the seven-segment display unit 39, it is possible to grasp that the set value is the game set value 2, and the seven-segment display unit 39 displays 1, 2, 4 to 6 It is understood that the set value is the game set value 3 by displaying the five numbers, and the set value is displayed by displaying the five numbers 1-3, 5, and 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It can be grasped that the set value is 4 and the five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that the set value can be grasped as the game set value 5, and the 7-segment display section 39 shows 1 By displaying the five numbers 5 to 5, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 6.

  Further, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when segments A to G are to be controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target, segment A, is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When the sixth control target segment F is turned on, it can be recognized as “4”, and when the segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as “1”. That is, the numeral “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are the control targets, has been the control target. When the first control target segment A is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. When the segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that the segment B is either “2” or “3”. When the segment B is turned off, “5” and “3” are set. 6 ". Furthermore, it can be recognized as “3” when the third control target segment C is turned on, and can be recognized as “2” when the segment C is turned off. That is, the numeral “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control targets, becomes the control target. Further, the segment E, which is the fifth control object, can be recognized as “6” when the segment E is turned on, and can be recognized as “5” when the segment E is turned off. In other words, the numeral “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G become the control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers “1” and “4” can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off. In the present embodiment, even when the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, all the segments A to G are controlled. Unless it is targeted, control for displaying the next priority number is not started. Thereby, in order to identify all the non-set values, compared to the case where the control for displaying the next priority number is started at the stage where the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped, Many specific conditions need to be met. As a result, the degree of difficulty until all the non-set values are specified, and hence the degree of difficulty in recognizing the set values, can be increased, so that the set values are prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, the set value can be prevented from being grasped by the player in a short time, so that a decrease in the game time in the gaming machine 10 can be prevented, and the gaming machine 10 Of the operation rate can be suppressed.

  If the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is started. It may be. For example, when the numerical priority is “1” → “2” → “3” →..., The segment F in which the control order for the numeral “1” is the sixth is set as the control target. When it is determined that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is “1”, the segment G having the seventh control order is not set as a control target and the next priority number “ The control for displaying "2" may be started. By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next display target number after all the segments A to G are controlled, before all the segments A to G are controlled, Even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the next number to be displayed is not performed until all the segments A to G have been controlled. Does not start. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the next number to be displayed is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player is displayed in the seven-segment display unit 39. May be displayed during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. On the other hand, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is performed. If it is started, after one non-set value can be specified, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value cannot be controlled. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by unnecessary control of the segments A to G.

  On the other hand, during the predetermined period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 is counted cumulatively, after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode is started. Until it ends. In other words, the beginning of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the normal jackpot game opening / closing execution mode is ended (the ending of the normal jackpot game starts. At which point it is). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the initial hit is a normal jackpot and a single hit), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. To the end of the big hit game opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the case of a single hit, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), when the winning in the probability change jackpot in the low probability mode (when the initial hit is the probability change jackpot and the jackpot cascade is started), the jackpot casino is started for a predetermined period. This is a period from the start of the probability change jackpot game for the initial hit as a trigger to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game for the regular jackpot as a trigger for the end of the jackpot series. That is, in the case of the jackpot casino, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period in which the game balls 99 stay in the game ball staying section 38, and a plurality of predetermined periods are set in accordance with the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

  By the way, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game or the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is special circumstances. Therefore, the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38 is set for each jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In addition, the predetermined period during which the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 is counted from the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game to the normal jackpot. With this setting, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. Then, in the jackpot game, in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period, the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball staying portion 38 in the specific period (the ball hits the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37). By controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of gaming balls 99), information (all or a part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) for which the non-set value can be specified or estimated is displayed. In the ending after the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game with respect to the jackpot, the non-set value can be specified or estimated in accordance with the accumulated number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed. Thus, even when a player who does not know the timing at which a non-set value other than the set value can be specified or estimated can proceed with the game, the game ends before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or estimated. Is prevented. Therefore, even if the player does not know the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or estimated, the non-set value can be specified or estimated, and the set value can be specified by specifying all the non-set values. Also becomes possible. In addition, a so-called hyena action of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which the non-set value can be specified or estimated can be excluded.

  In addition, since the specific period is set for each jackpot game started in the predetermined period, the predetermined period is set from the initial jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot in the extended casino jackpot. Therefore, the predetermined period is longer in the extended game big hit than in the single hit, and the predetermined time becomes longer as the number of times the big hit game is executed increases. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 is larger in the republication jackpot than in the single shot. It is highly likely that the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball 373 increases. Thereby, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, but also obtain more information for specifying or estimating the non-set value, and The advantage is that the value can be easily guessed or specified.

  Note that the beginning of the specific period in which the game balls 99 stay in the game ball staying section 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and is not limited to the start of the jackpot game, and the open / close execution mode starts (the opening of the first hit ends). It may be the time when it is done. In addition, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is preferably set as one section including the open / close execution mode for one big hit game. Accordingly, based on the number of specific conditions that are established when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 316 in the opening / closing execution mode (the game ball 99 that has passed through the special out ball port 373 of the clune device 37). ), The information for specifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the elapse of the specific period. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode, that is, after the elapse of the specific period, By paying attention to the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to enjoy the game by specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the displayed content.

  In addition, the beginning of the predetermined period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 is counted only when the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started. Instead, it may be set to a jackpot game. Preferably, at the time when the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode), for example, the opening / closing execution mode of the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first hit is finished). You may. In this way, by setting the beginning of the predetermined period to the jackpot game with respect to the initial hit, the predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of the single hit and the extended hit, so that one time An opportunity to guess or specify a non-set value for the first hit is guaranteed at least once.

  On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the normal jackpot game opening / closing execution mode ends, and may be set during the jackpot game. For example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game It is possible. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be a point in time when the normal jackpot game ends (ending in the jackpot ends) or a point in time when the time-saving mode shifted to after the normal jackpot ends. Further, in the present embodiment, the description is made on the assumption that the loop probable machine is used. However, in other types of game machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one-type and two-type mixers, a predetermined period is set in accordance with the form. It is also possible to set. For example, in the case of the V-ST machine, when there is no V winning at the initial hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same manner as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop probability changing machine. ), The start of the first jackpot game or opening / closing execution mode is the beginning of the predetermined period, and the end point of the opening / closing execution mode at the jackpot without V winning, or the end point of the specified number of jackpot lotteries in the high probability mode, etc. The end of the predetermined period may be considered.

  In addition, the predetermined period may be set to a period in which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the big hit game) irrespective of the big hit game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of the condition (specific condition) in which all or a part of the specific information (number) indicating the non-set value is displayed, and the normal game state (high probability mode and Period of stay in the low-frequency support mode (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), and period of staying in the time-saving mode (from the end of the normal jackpot to the transition to the normal gaming state) Period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (usually the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), and until a predetermined number of jackpots are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode During the period until one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode receives a predetermined number of ordinary wins, one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode Until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313 on both sides, until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won on the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. During a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning opening 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the through gate 317 is used in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are hit on the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and the like. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set as a period from the start of the variable game (start of the variable display of the decorative symbol) to the end of the variable game (end of the variable display of the decorative symbol). In this case, the entire period of one variable game may be the predetermined period, or a part of one variable game may be the predetermined period. When a predetermined period is set as a part of one variable game, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the display of the decorative design to the reach of the reach of the decorative design, and from the start of the display of the decorative design to the reach. The period from when the decorative design is in the reach state until the development effect is started, from the time the decorative design is in the reach state to the time when the development effect is started, and from the time the decorative design is in the reach state until the development effect is completed. , A period during which the development effect is executed, and the like.

  As described above, by setting the predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, the non-set value can be specified or estimated and the set value can be recognized or estimated even in periods other than the period in which the big hit game is executed. Will be possible. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

  When the predetermined period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the clune device 37 uses the game ball when the player hits the game ball 99 normally on the left area of the game board 31 and left-hits the ball. The position 99 is allocated to the normal out port 378 and the special out port 373 (for example, the left area (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or beside the first winning opening 314) of the game board 31). ) Is also conceivable. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (right-handed launch of the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31). Thereby, the user can enjoy the specification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding the game as usual without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314. Can be.

  In addition, depending on the type of the specific condition, the beginning of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Depending on the type of the specific condition, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  Note that the specific condition is that, instead of the game ball 99 being sorted by the sorting means such as the cloon device 37 being thrown into the special out ball 373 for a predetermined period, a specific area other than the special out ball 373 is used. , For example, when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or when the game ball 99 enters the various winning ports 313 to 316.

  In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, or the like or that passes through the through gate 317 is guided to the sorting means such as the clune device 37, and the game which is sorted by the sorting means The specific condition may be that the ball 99 enters the special out ball 373. Also in this case, it is possible to enjoy the specification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while performing the game as usual without performing a special launch.

  In addition, the specific condition may be that a specific event that can occur in the progress of the game occurs. The specific event in this case may be either a favorable situation or a disadvantageous event for the player. If the specific event is an event that is advantageous to the player, the player obtains all or a part of specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the privilege obtained by the occurrence of the specific event. Can be further obtained. On the other hand, when the specific event is a disadvantageous event for the player, the player takes all or one of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Parts can be obtained further. As a specific event, for example, winning a predetermined number of times (including one time) in a jackpot (executing a predetermined number of times (including one time) of a jackpot game), a predetermined number of times (one time) in a probability change or a normal jackpot ) Or more winnings (probable change or the normal jackpot game is executed more than a predetermined number of times (including once)), the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number or more (usually a change before winning a normal jackpot) Winning a predetermined number of times in succession to the jackpot), the number of jackpot lottery times until the jackpot is won reaches the predetermined number or more, and winning of the game ball 99 exceeding the upper limit in the round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game (Over winning) may occur.

  In addition, the specific event may be, for example, a specific effect set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to, for example, any of a non-reach effect and a reach effect, or may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect, and an ending effect. Typically, a specific production is a premium production in which a jackpot or a probable variable jackpot of a variable game production is determined, and in a jackpot game, a holding series is executed after the end of the jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game, At the start of the opening / closing execution mode, at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, at a specific point in time of the jackpot game, a lottery result is included in the hold at the specific point in time.) . Further, as a specific event, it is conceivable that the decorative symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a specific combination on the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at “777” on the symbol display portion 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach position such as “767”, a specific non-reach out-of-reach value such as “367” A temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that a development effect is performed when a development effect such as a super-reach effect or a special reach effect is performed as a reach effect, in addition to a case in which the stop effect is displayed at the (stop). Display) can be considered. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is to be executed, for example, as in “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display). It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" is to be executed is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

  Further, the specific condition may be satisfied in a relationship with the set value. That is, a specific condition may include a set value, and for example, a specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of the specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the number indicating the non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 is defined by the set value, as described later. Therefore, a number indicating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a different order depending on the type of the specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the jackpot lottery probability is high or low, and also to characterize the display of a plurality of non-set value numbers for each set value become.

  Also, the specified period for displaying the specific information indicating the non-set value or a part thereof (special information) when a specific condition is satisfied is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of the jackpot game, The timing may be set, and it may be set according to a relationship with a predetermined period, a relationship with a specific period, a relationship with a specific condition, or the like. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the prescribed period is typically set after the elapse of the prescribed period, as described in a second embodiment described later. Other than the above, for example, after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when the prescribed period is set to the execution period of the variable game, for example, when the decoration symbol in the variable game starts to change, the decoration symbol is in the reach state, the temporary stop display timing, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. The timing at which the development effect is started, the time during the execution of the development effect, and the like can be considered. That is, the specified period may be set to a period in which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to a period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific information can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the same time. Thereby, the player's interest in the variable game can be improved by displaying the specific information.

  Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is along the line X3-X3 in FIG. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along line X3-X3 of FIG. 8 when the stopper 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retaining section 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 8, and FIG. 10, the game ball retaining section 38 retains the game ball 99 in which the game ball enters the special out ball 373 for a specific period. , A discharge lane 382 and a stopper 383.

  The staying lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out port 373 of the clune device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The staying lane 381 is open at the top and inclined downward and to the left. The staying lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thus, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 have stayed in the staying lane 381, and the number of the staying game balls 99, that is, the ball has been thrown into the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 within a specific period. The number of the game balls 99 can be visually recognized. Further, it is preferable that the stay lane 381 is formed of a resin or the like so as to be transparent. By doing so, it is easy to grasp the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381. Note that, instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retaining lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, image display on the symbol display unit 341 and the like.

  The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the stay lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 staying in the stay lane 381 to a predetermined position, for example, a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. The special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves on the ejection lane 382. That is, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls entering the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 within a specific period. Used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384 so that the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved in the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs the special out ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. In the process, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when receiving the special out ball detection command, the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls by the MPU 51 and displays the number on the 7 segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The contents are controlled (see the command determination processing in FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

  In addition, as the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4, but the number of special out balls is counted in the audio lamp controller 5 based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

  The stopper portion 383 is provided between the stay lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward. When the stopper portion 383 is at the upper limit position, the game ball 99 can stay in the stay lane 381 (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward. When the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position, the game balls 99 of the staying lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (FIG. 10 (C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  The means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and allowing the game balls 99 in the staying lane 381 to discharge to the discharge lane 382 are not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, but may be, for example, a stopper that can move forward and backward. Other means such as a stopper, a stopper that can rotate between a standing state and a prone state, and the like may be used. Further, a configuration may be employed in which the game ball 99 is kept by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 is discharged by releasing the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. . Further, by making the stay lane 381 move up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 stay and a state in which the game balls 99 are discharged. For example, the game ball 99 is made to stay by making the staying lane 381 wait at a position lower than the discharge lane 382, while the game ball 99 is made to move by moving the stay lane 381 to a position higher than the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening through which the game balls 99 can be ejected on the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game balls 99 can stay in the staying lane 381, and the game balls 99 can be transferred from the opening to the game board 31. May be configured to be able to move up and down the stay lane 381 between a position at which it can be discharged to the back side of the vehicle. In addition, by moving the box-shaped movable body instead of the staying lane 381, the game balls 99 can be kept in the movable body, and the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

  Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display unit, FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the seven-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and at least numerals 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11B and at least A to D as shown in FIG. The alphabet of F can be displayed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to a jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. From a value (numerical information), a plurality (five) of game setting values (non-setting values) other than a game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set for defining the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 (Specific numerical information)) is displayed by turning on or off each of the segments A to G. Specifically, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the number 1 is displayed by lighting the segments B and C, and the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. When the number is 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, and when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the segments A to D and G are lit. Thus, the number 3 is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4 and the non-set value is set in the game setting. When the value is 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the non-setting value is the game setting value 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. The number 6 is displayed by being turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is turned on at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, thereby clearly indicating that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

  The numbers corresponding to the non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as described later (see FIGS. 35 and 35). 36). As described later, the control order of turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( Fixed).

  In the seven-segment display unit 39, as described later, segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period) in the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Is turned on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 do not indicate the game setting value, but indicate a part of the specific information indicating the non-setting value, and correspond to the special information. . In other words, the special information is displayed using a part of the plurality of segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. As described above, not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the player can display the number on the 7-segment display section 39. In this case, not only can the non-set value be specified, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a part of the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even when the number is not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the non-set value can be estimated based on a part of the number and the user can enjoy the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Note that whether or not each of the segments A to G is to be controlled in the seven-segment display unit 39 may or may not be explicitly indicated to the player. When it is specified that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it is easier to estimate the set value than when the segments are not specified. In the present embodiment, since the control order of each of the segments A to G is fixed, it is not specified that each of the segments A to G is a control target, and a method is used in which it is difficult to estimate a set value. Have been. In the case where it is specified to the player that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, it is clearly indicated to the player that the segment is to be controlled, and the control target is controlled. By lighting the segment in a color different from the case of lighting the segment, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target.

  In the seven-segment display unit 39, information for specifying a non-set value may be displayed in an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-setting value is the game setting value 1, the alphabet A is displayed, when the non-setting value is the game setting value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, and the non-setting value is the game setting value 3. In the case, the alphabet C is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the alphabet D is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the alphabet E is displayed, and the non-set value is displayed. Is a game setting value 6, an alphabet F may be displayed (see FIG. 11C).

  The main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first reserved number display section 364, and a second reserved number arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The display unit 365 is provided.

  The ordinary symbol display section 361 includes an LED pair as an ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), and determines whether or not to open the motorized accessory 315b that is executed in response to a prize in the through gate 317. The result is displayed by a combination of turning on / off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair (usually displaying the symbols in a variable manner) upon winning of the through gate 317 and turns on or off each LED after the variable display time has elapsed, so that a lottery per ordinary drawing is performed. To display the result.

  The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed when a prize is won in the first winning opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special figure lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variable display of the first special symbol) upon winning of the first prize port 314, and changes each segment after the lapse of the variable display time. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed in response to winning in the second winning opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special figure lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the second special symbol) upon winning of the second prize hole 315, and displays each segment after the lapse of the variable display time. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and the retained number N of the first special figure of the variable display generated by winning the first winning opening 314 is determined by the number of lighted four LEDs. indicate.

  The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group composed of four LEDs, and the retained number M of the second special figure of the variable display generated by winning the second winning opening 315 is determined by the number of lighted four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing ball balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of payout balls of game balls by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and a driving unit provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a predetermined jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 performs processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. The MPU 41 determines whether or not a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316 have a ball based on detection signals from the ball-in sensors 313a to 317a, It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out-balls (the number of fired balls) based on a detection signal from the out-ball sensor 318a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a sound lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 instructs the sound ramp control device 5 to change the variation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, the shift command, the big hit game start command, the round game start command, the round game end command, the ending start command, the big hit game. It outputs commands such as an end command, a special out ball detection command, and a set value change command.

  The fluctuation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit. The variation pattern command is set at the time of starting the symbol variation display by the main display unit 36 in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later based on information stored in the later-described holding storage area 412b. You. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and the type of the big hit in the big hit lottery is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  When the number of holds N or the number of holds M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, the first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, a fluctuation pattern, and a change pattern. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described holding storage area 412b when the holding number N or the holding number M increases (see FIG. 22 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the success / failure information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25 described below.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Is set in the game state transition process in the main process. In addition, the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, so the audio ramp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the start of the opening can be grasped. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting each round game and the number of rounds indicating the number of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. Are set in the big hit game control process in the main process of FIG. In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started. Alternatively, an opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The round game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of ending the round game in the open / close execution mode in the big hit game, and is set in a big hit game control process in a main process of FIG. 23 described later. You.

  The big hit game end command is a command for notifying the sound ramp control device 5 that the big hit game is finished, and is set in a big hit game control process in a main process of FIG. 23 described later.

  The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and is described later with reference to FIG. This is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and the control content in the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined.

  The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the set value has been changed and the set value after the change, and is set in step S1710 in the set value changing process in FIG. 27 described below. .

  Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 also includes an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs the frequency to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process described below executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider.

  In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 generates a main timer signal to be described later every time a rising (or falling) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the loading process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also mounted on the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 or the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power saving area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining a missed type. included. The lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining a fluctuation display time in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric auditors hand 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be in the electric open state, and an initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4 are set. And a normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for the above. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

  The suspension storage area 412b includes a first suspension storage area REA, a second suspension storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first hold storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 displays and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second hold storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 performs the variable display and the stop display is referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

  When a game ball enters the first winning port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. The acquisition process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually associated with each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is provided with the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. REA4 and one of the first to fourth reserved areas REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB.

  Therefore, the variable game executed on the basis of the hit / failure information stored in the first to fourth holding areas REB1 to REB4 of the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 and the second holding storage area REB corresponds to 19 games. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variable display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning port 314, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first reserved area REA1, the second reserved area REA2, the third reserved area REA3, and the fourth reserved area REA4. Is stored in the area where In the number-of-reservations storage area NAA, the number of the validity information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number of reservations N.

  Also, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first reserved area REB1, the second reserved area REB2, the third reserved area REB3, and the fourth reserved area REB4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAB, the number of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 is stored as the number of reservations M.

  In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning area 314 is formed by the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. In addition, it is possible to suspend up to four pieces of winning / failing information as winning histories to the second winning opening 315, respectively.

  It is to be noted that another embodiment is considered in which the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 in common as another embodiment. It is possible to suspend the winning / failing information as a winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is, when the symbol change display on the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341 is started, the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. Is a storage area used to move the pass / fail information stored in the storage area. Specifically, the hit information of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit information does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the number-of-reservations storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number N of holds in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Another embodiment is also considered in which the success / failure information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding area RB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, when one variable game is started, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, and the third holding area REA1 is shifted to the third holding area REA1. The rejection information stored in the reservation area REA3 shifts to the second reservation area REA2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 shifts to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is shifted to the third holding area REB1. The rejection information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Two types of random number values for the jackpot winning are set in the winning / rejecting table stored in the winning / rejecting table storage area of the ROM 411 in correspondence with the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probable change game state. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B, as the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit (big hit probability) is set as the game setting value. There are provided a plurality of hit / fail tables depending on the situation. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include six success / failure tables respectively corresponding to the game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) in the low probability mode success / failure table, There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/229 / 2.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

  In the game setting value 5, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode success / failure tables. In other words, with the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

  In the game setting value 6, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) in the low probability mode success / failure table, and high There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

  If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery between the same game setting values is the big hit are common, but it is also considered that the random numbers with the big hit are not common. Can be In addition, the random number that is a jackpot winning may not be a continuous value, but may be a partly or entirely discrete value.

  In addition, the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table are provided six each according to the game setting value of the six stages, but at least one success / failure table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting value is not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting values, while providing one high probability mode success / failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of game setting values for the low-probability mode, and not to provide a step-by-step game setting value for the high-probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the assignment table stored in the assignment table storage area of the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning in the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that can be a 5R probability change jackpot is 0 to 10 The number of random numbers that will be 16R probability variable jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 from 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by a prize in the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that can be a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and a 16R probability variable jackpot. The number of the fourth random numbers is 5-14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5-15. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability change jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability-variable gaming state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high), the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low-probability mode and electric As compared with the low-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the object 315b is low, the expected value of obtaining the game ball when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher.

  In the present embodiment, separate winnings are provided for each of the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-type change machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-type two-type mixer, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, “16R probable jackpot”, “5R normal It is determined which of “big hit” and “missing”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times is executed. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of the 5R probability change jackpot or the 16R probability change jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game mode shifts to the probability change game state of the high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the probability changing game state is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability changing jackpot”, “16R probability changing jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R regular jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the electric accessory 315b is open frequently with the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of a lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpots of a predetermined number of times such as 50 times or 100 times. If the player determines that the lottery result in the jackpot is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the process ends.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of the loop probability changing machine, after the big hit game at the time of the probability changing big hit, the predetermined number of big hits (for example, 50 times, 100 times) is completed. If the lottery is executed in the probable play state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has elapsed, the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) Mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a drop lottery from a certain variable game state to a time saving game state or a normal game state. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is off, the state is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, that is, a 5R jackpot, a 16R jackpot, and a 5R jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, according to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the reach occurs, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the deviation. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of reach, ie, reach other than before and after the stop where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete miss where no reach occurs.

  Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the departure type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the random number value for reach out of order is 0 to 8, the random number value for reach other than out of order is 9 to 38, and the random number value for complete out of reach is 39. 238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certain jackpot, 16R certain jackpot, or 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the reach indicates a state in which a symbol combination of a decorative symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to be displayed between the time when the symbol change display is started on the symbol display unit 341 and the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one of the stop positions fluctuates. Also, while the reach is fluctuating in the symbol display unit 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation buttons 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. A user participation type operation effect process is executed. During the execution of the effect processing, the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

  For example, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the value of the electric auditors product opening counter C4 stored in the electric auditors holding area 412c to determine whether or not the electric auditors product 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time. For example, it is conceivable that the winning is performed when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is out of order.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variable display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the type of the variation pattern in this manner, the sound ramp control device 5 allows the rough variation game effect such as a high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, and a special reach effect. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the outlier variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these change tables may be provided separately for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C) are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table. As shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probable variation jackpot variation table and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously determined according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery is a normal jackpot variation table. If the result is "out", the type of the fluctuation pattern is specified by referring to the outlier fluctuation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the normal reach effect pattern in the symbol display unit 341. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the super reach effect in the symbol display unit 341. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a super reach effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern in which the fluctuation display time is the longest 90 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern). The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (C), in the departure variation table, the departure type counter CS1 is provided for each departure stop type determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (departure before and after reach, reach other than before and after departure, complete departure). And the corresponding relationship with the fluctuation pattern are defined. More specifically, when the type of stop at the time of departure is the out-of-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-reach reach, any of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of departure is completely departure, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 7 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In the section 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed. When the fluctuation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 10 s as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In the section 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display is released without a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at a symbol. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a variation display of a variation pattern in which the variation display is released with a notice effect in which a character, a message, and the like are displayed and the pattern is stopped at a symbol is displayed. Be executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of the off corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the type of the variation pattern is not limited to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 15A, 15B, and 15C. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach production performed in the normal reach production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", a plurality of types of normal reach productions with different characters, stories, and the like are prepared, The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, and the like are prepared and selected from among them. One of the super reach productions performed is performed. The super reach production is a reach production that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production (expected degree), and the big hit is won than the special reach production This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (degree of expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", and are selected from among them. One of the special reach productions performed is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and is, for example, an effect that evolves from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is informed that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  In addition, in the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, the operation button 20 of the player A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation is reflected in an effect and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by a player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  When the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating a fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341, the MPU 41 determines the fluctuation pattern and the big hit lottery. A fluctuation pattern command indicating a lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal big hit”, the MPU 41 determines that the fluctuation pattern command “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal big hit is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. A01 ”to“ A03 ”are output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable change jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. To “B03”. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the change pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating the 16R probability change hit before the change patterns “01” to “03”. To “C03”. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” to which “D” indicating that the lottery is out is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result, the symbol display unit 341. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed by are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn off the light.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will run. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information relating to a game history, payout performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, the “number of out-balls”, “the number of general payout payouts”, “the first payout number payouts”, and “the second payout number payouts”. , "Variable winning opening payout number", "set value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "accessory ratio information", "cumulative jackpot lottery count", "unit jackpot lottery count", "The number of jackpots" and "the number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, “set value”, “base information”, “continuous bonus ratio information”, “principal ratio information”, and “unit jackpot lottery count” are gaming information (performance information) relating to payout performance. Corresponds to.

  The “number of balls out” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The “out ball number” is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG.

  The “number of general winning port payout balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the general winning port 313 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This “general winning port payout ball number” is set when a winning in the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball input sensor 313a in the normal game state, as described below. In the processing, when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls in accordance with the prize to the general prize port 313, the number of payout balls by the current prize is updated to a value added. .

  The “number of first winning port payout balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the first winning port 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This “number of first winning opening payout balls” is determined when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state, and the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. In setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Update to

  The “number of payout balls of the second winning opening” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This “number of second payout opening payout balls” is determined when the winning sensor 315a detects a winning in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state, and the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. In setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second winning port 315 in the command setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Update to

  The “variable winning opening payout ball count” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state. This “variable winning opening payout ball number” is set when a winning in the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the ball input sensor 316a in the jackpot game state, and the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the number of payout balls by the current prize is updated to a value added. .

  The “set value” is used to select a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment). In other words, the “set value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, six levels of set values (six types of low probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 14A) and high probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 14B) with different jackpot probabilities) Is prepared. The “setting value” is updated in a setting value changing process in FIG. 27 described below.

  The “base information” is information relating to “base” which is a payout rate (payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the “base” is the “number of out-balls” in the normal game state. Is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “general winning opening payout number” to the “first winning opening payout number”. When the “base” is represented by a mathematical formula, “base” = 100 × (“the number of payout balls to be paid out in general” + “the number of payouts to pay out the first winning opening”) / “the number of outgoing balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out-balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information updating process of FIG. 28 described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out-balls reaches 60,000 ball is the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous out-ball number reaches 60,000 ball is The base information is stored in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as “base information” as the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before. Until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Further, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000, the “base information” includes the “number of general payout-payout balls” and “first prize-winning mouth” described above. In addition to the "number of payout balls" and "the number of outgoing balls", the "number of general payout opening payout balls", "the number of first winning opening payout balls", and "the number of outgoing balls" for base calculation are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes the “current base BL”, the “previous 60,000-ball base B1”, and the “previous 60,000-ball base B2”. However, a base of 60,000 coins for the past three times or more may be left as a history. The “base information” may include an accumulated base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

  The “continuous role ratio information” is the total number of payout balls by winning in all winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, and variable winning opening 316) with payout of prize balls. In this example, the information on the “continuous bonus ratio”, which is a ratio of the number of variable payout opening payout balls. When the “continuous bonus ratio” is represented by a mathematical formula, “continuous bonus ratio” = 100 × “variable winning opening payout ball count” / “total payout ball count”. The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a later-described specific performance information update process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “continuous bonus ratio information” is a period for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the ratio may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “principal ratio information” indicates the total number of payout balls by winning in all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) for which a prize ball is paid out. In addition, it is information on the “government ratio”, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the second payout hole payout ball and the variable payout mouth payout ball. When the "combination of bonuses" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "combination of bonuses" = 100 * ("the number of payouts of the second winning opening" + "the number of payouts of the variable winning opening") / "the total number of payouts". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 described below. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as an accumulated accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. Note that the “principal ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of big hits are drawn (for example, 1000 times) in the normal game state, The ratio of the accessory to the outgoing ball may be a fixed number (for example, a period until the number of outgoing balls reaches 60,000). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” indicates that a jackpot lottery was performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. It is the number of times. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is a cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 is triggered by the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process in FIG. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to the number of jackpot lotteries that have been triggered by a prize in the first winning port 314 for a certain number of minus balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main This is the number of times the symbol change display is executed on the first special symbol display unit of the display unit 36). In the present embodiment, the predetermined number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting “the number of general payout payouts” and “the first payout payout number” from the “outside payout”. In other words, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is the variable display count (the jackpot lottery) of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 of the average of 1,000 yen when receiving 250 lending balls for 1000 yen in the game hall. Received.) Note that the “unit jackpot lottery count” may be the number of times a large number of jackpot lotteries have been received for a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in a specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 described below. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot counts (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in a normal game state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery count”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count and the unit jackpot lottery count in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

  The "number of jackpots" is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the start of the business of the gaming hall to the present until the present have become a jackpot. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state in the game state shift processing executed in step S1306 of the main processing of FIG. The "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “number of consecutive misses” is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery have been consecutively lost in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is 0 when the lottery result is a big hit. Cleared. When the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later, the result of the determination as to whether or not the number of consecutive misses is based on the low probability mode determination table in step S1603 is determined. If it is off, it is incremented by one, and if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, it is cleared to zero. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive misses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10. Of course, the “number of consecutive misses” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “set value” stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” on the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the first special symbol display unit 362 and / or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

  The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet “B”, a dot is turned on to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number “0” and “0.” is displayed. Also, when displaying any one of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to turn on a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  In the performance display monitor 43, the left seven-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is indicated by an abbreviation symbol, and the right two seven-segments. The indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbol “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L” in the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 that are the identification segments. , And the base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 as the ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 switches on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) collectively by a pressing operation, and is located at an easily operable position with the inner frame 12 expanded. (See FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When an operation for turning on the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation of turning off the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided other than the main control device 4.

  Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18 (B) to 18 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → previous 60,000 is used as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The ball base B1 → the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time → the current base BL is sequentially looped, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18C, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% twice before the previous game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  A program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous 60,000-ball base B2, A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  In the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the “base information”, the game information is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as “continuous role ratio information” or “ratio ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by another form of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 selects the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) referred to in the jackpot lottery. The above-mentioned set value is displayed, and is constituted by a 7-segment display. Note that the set value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display. The set value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches on / off of the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and enables the change of the set value by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation at a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, when the set value display unit 45 is turned off and a press operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the 7-segment display is energized and the set value display unit is turned on. A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current set values. In the illustrated example, the set value is “1”. On the other hand, if the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the set value display unit 45 is on, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when the setting value display section 45 is turned on and a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is increased by rotating the set value display section 45 clockwise, and displayed on the set value display section 45 by rotating the set value display section 45 counterclockwise. The numbers that are given are smaller. When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed by rotating the set value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a set value. Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before the setting is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 determines whether the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14A) or the high-probability mode hit / fail table (FIG. 14B) is selected in accordance with the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Jackpot lottery can be performed based on the same).

  Note that the method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the setting value is determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), and the setting is performed by repeatedly hitting or long pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45, and inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key to display the set value. A method of changing the number displayed on the unit 45 and then removing the key may be used.

  Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the set value display section 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11). ) Can be selected from a visible state and a non-visible state. That is, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is closed with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is opened with respect to the front frame 11. , The set value display section 45 can be visually recognized. Accordingly, when the player executes a game in the gaming machine 10, the set value display section 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened, so that the setting is performed by the number displayed on the set value display section 45. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. When the setting value display section 45 is in the lighting state, the pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, so that the setting value display section 45 is turned off. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is kept off during business hours of the gaming hall, and the set value display unit 45 is visible by opening the game board 31 due to clogging of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Even in the state, the set value display section 45 can prevent the set value from being grasped by the player.

  On the other hand, when the set value display section 45 is in the light-out state, the pressing operation is performed on the set value change operation section 46 to be turned on, and the number corresponding to the set value is not displayed. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value display section 45 is turned on by performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation section 46. The set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display section 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation section 46. This makes it possible to change the set value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the set value during the business hours.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol change display and a symbol change display in the symbol display unit 341. Execute the effect display.

[Sound lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like, lamp blink patterns, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and sends a command to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal), and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when performing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the audio ramp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio ramp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

  The speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the command input from the main control device 4, the MPU 51 outputs the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, the stopper 383 of the game ball staying unit 38. , The 7-segment display section 39, etc. can be controlled. The vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is controlled by the MPU 51, so that the game ball (special out The state in which the ball is retained is selected, and the state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retaining lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 is selected. The MPU 51 controls turning on or off of each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, an image game effect performed on the symbol display unit 341 and sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output effect, a lamp effect by the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes a predetermined calculation process based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4.

  More specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (decorative symbol combination (see FIG. 38A)), a fluctuation display time, and a fluctuation type (FIG. 38) based on the fluctuation pattern command. (B)) and the effect pattern type (see FIG. 39 (A) to FIG. 37 (C)), and a display change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (FIG. 37). In step S2105 in the command determination process of the above, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, if the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the audio lamp controller 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit that measures time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341 and images such as a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a departure effect image are stored. ing. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include a still image and a moving image. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of the image to be used and the display timing, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball rental device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of game balls is Will be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 are fired by the firing rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount, so that the game ball on the shooting rail 321 is directed to the game board 31. Fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

  The firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. Accordingly, the launch control IC 81 sets the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to be strong.

  Further, the firing handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to perform an operation for arbitrarily stopping the firing of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 32 is stopped. Thus, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player does not touch the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop firing the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, and the like, a +5 V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by electric power supplied from power supply equipment. Thus, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

  Further, when determining that the power supply has been interrupted, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24 V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches a preset less than 22 V. Judge. When receiving the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interruption process.

[Processing of Main Controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, main timer interrupt processing started periodically, and executed at the time of power failure. It performs NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and the execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. When an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the out ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the out ball number in the game information storage area 412d. I do. Further, when a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and the counter value reaches the maximum value. In this case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process in accordance with a winning in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the launch control process is based on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for validating the launch of. In addition, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the firing handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the processing to be performed. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch game balls when the launch of gaming balls is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to set the electric bonus item 315b of the second winning opening 315 to the electric winning open state based on the ordinary winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric winning holding area 412c. Execute the through gate processing to be executed. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. When the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit is a normal hit, and when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 249, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit has occurred. Judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199 and determines that the normal hit is a normal hit. Judge that there is. If the MPU 41 determines that the winning is a normal hit in the through gate process, the MPU 41 opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined period of time. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the gaming board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is juxtaposed.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that there is no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ) And the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No) (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 checks the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. 23). , And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 updates the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is subjected to the jackpot success / failure determination in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26). Confirmation is performed, and a first suspension command setting process for setting a first suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has been made to the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and determines that there is no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings M is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning processing, and shifts the processing to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No) (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 checks the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. 23). , And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the hit / failure information for the second hold obtained in step S1109 is to be determined as a hit / failure in a change start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. The contents are confirmed, and a second pending command setting process for setting the second pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, and thus the detailed description is omitted. The second hold command setting process is as follows. In the first hold command setting process of FIG. 22, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command” and “number of holds N” is read as “number of holds M”. Good.

[First hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out of order), the variation pattern, and the number of holds N. . Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the number of holds N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step S1). S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the high-probability mode at the time of transition to the high-probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later. The determination is made based on the high-probability mode flag that is set to off at the time of transition to another game state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the later-described set value change process in FIG. , A determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process in FIG. Based on the win / fail table, a win / fail determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the big win.

  Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, a pass / fail decision is made based on the high-probability mode pass / fail table or the low-probability mode pass / fail table stored in accordance with the set value in step S1712 in the set value changing process in FIG. In step S1203 or S1204, the setting value stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later is read, and the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the set value is sequentially read. A selection may be made to determine whether or not it is appropriate.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (Step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot (step S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21, the big hit type counter C2 and the change type included in the hit / fail information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning processing of FIG. 21 is the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. Can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holds N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first hold command uses the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize in which of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 the first reserved command corresponds to the validity information stored in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above description as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next period. You.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 outputs the output data such as the command set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20 or the previous main processing to the control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Executes the external output process to be sent to. For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery number update command are set. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, and the like. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), the MPU 41 stores the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a winning has occurred. The number of payout balls to be paid out or the first payout number to be paid out is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Further, in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probable change game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), the MPU 41 determines whether the RAM 412 is present when a prize is generated in the second winning opening 315. Is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, when a prize is generated in the variable winning opening 316, the variable winning opening payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is changed to the payout number of the present winning. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Is done. At this time, the MPU 41 determines the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating a lottery result of the jackpot lottery and a variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game including the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and thereby the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (the jackpot type). Execute as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the big hit game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in FIG. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, the probability change game state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high probability mode. A transition is made to a time-saving game state that is a frequency support mode, a normal game state that is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the like.

  For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the big hit gaming state after the end of the variable game informing the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the big hit game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the big hit gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to a lottery result in the big hit lottery that has triggered the execution of the big hit game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability change jackpot or a 16R probability change jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability change game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the game is shifted to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game. When the notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the specified number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the shift to off while setting the flag for the gaming state after the shift to on. For example, the MPU 41 turns off the big hit game flag and turns on the high probability mode flag when there is a transition of the game state from the big hit game state to the certain change game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability-variable gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to off while the jackpot gaming flag is set to on.

  Further, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the “number of jackpots” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value changing process. In this set value change process, a process of controlling the display or non-display of the set value or the change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with an operation on the set value change operation unit 46 is executed. The details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the set value changing process is executed in the main process, but is limited to a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or a period from after the start-up process until the launch of the game ball is started. It is also conceivable that it is executed. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the set value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the set value can be prevented from being changed within the business hours of the game hall. .

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of jackpot lotteries, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. During the remaining time up to this point, steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game. If the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process. If the game is over and the big hit is not being played (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The execution of the jackpot game is set to on at the time of transition to the jackpot game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, and turned off at the time of transition from the jackpot game state to another game state. Is determined based on the jackpot game flag set in.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not being performed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON at the start of the variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (Step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 has a jackpot lottery result corresponding to the variable game. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 determines the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold number storage area NAA of the hold number storage area NAB of the hold number storage area 412b. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when one of the number of hold N and the number of hold M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 performs a data setting process on the data of the success / failure information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the processing in step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a change display based on the success / failure information, and ends the change game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holdings M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of holdings M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). The process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, when the hold number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the contact information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the contact information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the contact information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the number of hold M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts when both or one of the number of hold M and the number of hold N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines that the number of holds N is not 0, and executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the second to fourth holding areas REB2 to REB4 one by one (Step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit / fail information of the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the hit / fail information of the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the hit information of the fourth holding area REB4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the processing in step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the hit / fail information of the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 or the first to fourth holding areas REB4 has shifted. Then, the shift command set in this step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the processing in step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting processing, and shifts the processing to step S1408 in FIG.

[Change start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the change start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability mode. Whether or not the mode is the high probability mode is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to on. . When the game state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the game state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, when the game state is the low probability mode If there is, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 uses the high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) stored in accordance with the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 uses the low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, a pass / fail decision is made based on the high-probability mode pass / fail table or the low-probability mode pass / fail table stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value changing process in FIG. In steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later is read, and the high-probability mode success / failure table or the low-probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the set value is sequentially read. You may make a selection and make a determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation game in the fluctuation display time counter. More specifically, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the hit is successful in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines the change pattern based on the change type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot change table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. If the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). . Further, when the result of the determination of success or failure in step S1602 or S1603 is out of range, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a fluctuation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation game and the fluctuation pattern specified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the change pattern command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 5, and the sound ramp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the change pattern command. The symbol variation display and the like by the unit 341 are executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets “A01” to “A01” in which “A” indicating the 5R normal jackpot is added to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. A03 ”is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “B01” to “B03” in which the variation pattern “01” to “03” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “C01” to “C03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” have “C” indicating that it is a 16R probable jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “missing”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information on any of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the front and back out, and complete out of reach.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36, and ends the variation start processing. Note that, when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started, the MPU 41 sets a variation display flag to ON. The variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process in FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variable display is being displayed on the main display unit 36. When the symbol change display on the main display unit 36 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is out of order, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive outs” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success / failure results in a big hit. In some cases, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to zero.

[Setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and if the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change processing ends. If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not being performed (Step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state (Step S1702). If the game is in the jackpot game state (Step S1702: Yes), the set value is set. If the change process is completed and the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: NO), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is present (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting. It is determined whether or not an operation of turning on the power of the set value display unit 45 is performed on the value change operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes) or when the game is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1704, and switches the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704). Then, the number indicating the read set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 (step S1705). As a result, the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the set value display flag indicating that the set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the set value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value displaying flag indicates that the set value is displayed on the set value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S1707: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1708, and if the setting value displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1707: NO). That is, when the power is not turned on while the set value display unit 45 is in the light-off state, the set value changing process ends.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S1707: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. If the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1709, and if the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: NO), The process shifts to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and vice versa. Then, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 by one before the rotation is displayed.

  When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is “6”, when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the set value change operation section 46 is displayed on the set value display section 45. Is changed to “1”, and if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is “1”, the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to “6”. Further, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is “6”, it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is “1”. Alternatively, it may not be rotated further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the set value display section 45 as the set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the set value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid set value and the game information in the RAM 412 is finally set. It is stored in the storage area 412d. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, by turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the set value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the change of the set value. It is determined whether or not an operation to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45 is performed on the operation unit 46. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1712, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. In this case (step S1711: No), the setting value change processing ends. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 shuts off the power to the 7-segment display to indicate the set value. Is turned off, and the set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the low-probability mode is valid in accordance with the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (See FIG. 14A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag for displaying the set value to off, and ends the set value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) according to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. That is, since the low / high probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table select the success / failure table having the same set value, the setting value changing operation is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the set value of the low-probability mode is set to “1” and the set value of the high-probability mode is set to “6”. It becomes possible to do.

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out-balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the number of out-balls reaches 60,000. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1802). If the number of out-balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1805, and if the number of out-balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1802. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out-balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general winning-hole payout balls and the number of first winning-hole payout balls for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 determines the number of outgoing balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1801, and the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1803. The current base BL is calculated based on the current base BL, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of general winning opening payout balls + the number of first winning opening payout balls) / the number of outgoing balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out-balls has reached 60000 (Step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (Steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base two times before in the base information (step S1805). The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000-ball base B1 (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls, and the number of outgoing balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808). ).

<Step S1809>
When the processing in step S1804 or S1808 ends, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809). ), And ends the specific performance information update processing. In this case, the specific performance is, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big hit, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current status base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ) And the process moves to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the last 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No) ) And the process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 in FIG. When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No) ) And the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display-in-progress flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a fixed time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. In step S1908, it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No) ) And the process moves to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", and "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), and sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913). The display control processing ends.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the alphabet indicating the current base BL. And the number are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1915). S1916), and ends the display control processing.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. In step S1917, it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No) ) And the process moves to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1919), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The 60,000-ball base B2 included two times before in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "2." , "3", and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and thus the previous 60,000-ball base B1. Are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924). S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display-in-progress flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. (S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (Step S1927: No). ) And the process moves to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current status BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a fixed time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (Step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (Step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. Are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1933). S1934), the display control process ends.

[Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio ramp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that another or another embodiment in which part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 is also considered. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the start-up of the sound lamp control apparatus 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 sets the display order (step S2000), updates the counter (step S2001), determines the command (step S2002), and performs the variable game effect processing (step S2003). The big hit game rendering process (step S2004) and the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) are executed.

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game setting value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 and displays the game setting value (set value) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period. The order of the numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In the present embodiment, the set value suggestion process is executed in the jackpot game for a predetermined period, so that five numbers for specifying a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values) other than the set value are set. Are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example. Hereinafter, details of the display order setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to ON (Step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set value in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. . The display order setting flag is initially set to off when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub-timer interrupt process by the start-up process of the audio lamp control device, the sub-timer interrupt process is displayed by the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set.

  By the way, the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 is set, so that the display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 and the information on the seven-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2012 when the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2014 when the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No). Move to

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that a game set value (set value) set for defining the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in a command determination process of FIG. This is set to on in step S2121. If the setting value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to off (step S2013), and then shifts the processing to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set. Since the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the set value is changed in this manner, the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value. Monotonous presentation of information on the display unit 39 can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512, and further sets the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 with reference to the set value and number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) ( Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing the display order and the 7-segment display section 39 described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the numbers and the display order of the numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (A), in the number display order determination table, a lottery is performed for each of the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set for defining the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. The display order of the numbers is specified by the random number. The lottery random numbers are 120 from 0 to 119, and one display order is associated with each lottery random value, and the selection probability of each display order is the same. The display order is: display order A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display order B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display order C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, setting The display order includes a display order D1 to D120 selected in the case of the value 4, a display order E1 to E120 selected in the case of the set value 5, and a display order F1 to F120 selected in the case of the set value 6. For each of 〜 to に, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

  The display order A1 to A120 that is selected when the set value 1 is selected is a five-digit number “2” that specifies game setting values (non-set values) 2 to 6 other than the number “1” that specifies the set value 1 The order in which to display “6” is defined (see FIG. 36B). In other words, when any one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value because the set value is 1, the number “1” specifying the set value 1 is changed to 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

  The display order B1 to B120 in which the setting value 2 is selected specifies the setting values “1”, “3” to “6” other than the numeral “2” for specifying the setting value 2, and the setting values 2 to 6 The order in which the five numbers “2” to “6” are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected in accordance with the lottery random number value by setting the value to 2, the number “2” specifying the setting value 2 is set to 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

  The display order C1 to C120 in which the setting value 3 is selected includes five numbers “1” and “5” specifying the setting values 1, 2, 4 to 6 other than the number “3” specifying the setting value 1. The order in which “2”, “4” to “6” are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number “3” that specifies the setting value 3 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Never.

  The display order D1 to D120 that is selected when the setting value 4 is selected is five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number “4” that specifies the setting value 4. The order in which “3”, “5”, and “6” are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the numeral “4” specifying that the setting value is 4 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Never.

  The display order E1 to E120 that is selected when the setting value 5 is selected is five numbers “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5 , "6" are specified (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the numeral “5” that specifies the set value 5 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Never.

  The display order F1 to F120 in which the setting value 6 is selected displays five numbers “1” to “5” specifying the setting values 1 to 5 other than the number “6” specifying the setting value 6 (See FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the numeral “6” that specifies that the setting value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Never.

  Then, when the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (Step S2011: No) and when the set value is changed (Step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to specify the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. The order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6).

  In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by turning on the power, and after the power is turned on, the set value is changed to change the number display order determination table. , The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined. Thus, when a predetermined condition (for example, turning on the power or changing a setting) is satisfied, it is possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order in a specified period. In the gaming hall, since the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before opening, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 and the information on the seven-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when the setting value is changed is set. Alternatively, the display order of the numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied may be set. The predetermined condition in this case will be described in a third embodiment which will be described later. As the predetermined condition, for example, a predetermined period is started, a big hit game is started, and a big hit game opening / closing execution mode is set. Is started. Even when the order of displaying the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set by the satisfaction of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 and prevent the information display on the seven-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

  In the numeral display order determination table shown in FIG. 36 (A), for the same set value, the probability that all numeral display orders are selected is the same, but the probability that numeral display orders are selected is not necessarily the same. No need to be. For example, the number display order determination table may be set so that the probability that at least some of the number display orders are selected for the same set value is different from the other number display orders. That is, it is conceivable that a specific display order is easily selected, and conversely, a specific display order is hardly selected. In this way, if the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected according to the set value is set to be different from the other number display order, a specific number display order can be easily selected according to the set value. It is also possible to make it difficult to select a particular numerical display order. That is, unlike the case where the probability of selecting the display order of all the numbers is the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. It is also possible to do. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of being a high set value and the likelihood of being a low set value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) is delayed. It may be. In this case, by leaving the possibility of being a high setting value at the end when it is a low setting value, it is possible to make the player have a low setting value while giving the player an expectation of the high setting value. Prevention of early identification by the player is prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent a game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early and suppress a decrease in the operating rate in the gaming machine 10 while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more), the display order of numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) is delayed. You may. In this case, the number corresponding to the high set value and the number corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until immediately before the set value is specified to be the high set value. Is a low setting value until just before the is set to the high setting value. With this, it is possible to pay attention to either the high setting value that is advantageous to the player or the low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrilling feeling immediately before the high setting value is grasped. . In addition, regardless of the set value, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not slow, and for example, the slowest display order may be easily selected. In this case, the number indicating the most unfavorable non-set value for the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the most unfavorable non-set value for the player and the player The possibility of a non-set value which is advantageous for This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the game setting value (big hit probability) is the most unfavorable game setting value for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early, A reduction in the operating rate of the machine can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is conceivable to set so that a number indicating a non-set value corresponding to the high set value and a number display order in which the display order of the number indicating the non-set value corresponding to the low set value is delayed can be easily selected. For example, a numerical display order in which the display order of at least one of “1” and “2” corresponding to the low set value and at least one of “5” and “6” corresponding to the high set value is late is selected. It is also conceivable to make it easier. In this case as well, until immediately before the player grasps the set value, the possibility that the set value is advantageous for the player and the possibility that the set value is disadvantageously low for the player are included. Until just before grasping, it is possible to enjoy the thrilling feeling of whether the set value is the high set value or the low set value.

  Except for the case where the set value is the highest set value (set value is 6), it is set so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value is delayed, so that the number display order is easily selected. It is possible. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value having a higher advantage determination probability than a set value is set to a higher selectivity of a display order lower than a number indicating a non-set value having a lower advantage determination probability than the set value. Can be considered. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values higher than the set value in this way, the player is expected to have a possibility that the set value is higher than the actual set value immediately before grasping the set value. Can be. Thus, it is possible to guess and enjoy the non-set value (set value) while expecting the possibility that the set value is high until immediately before grasping the set value. Contrary to this, except for the case where the set value is the lowest set value (the set value is 1), the numerical display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values lower than the set value is delayed is easy to select. It is conceivable to set as follows. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value having a lower advantage determination probability than a set value is set to a higher selectivity of a display order lower than a number indicating a non-set value having a higher advantage determination probability than the set value. Can be considered. In this way, by delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values lower than the set values, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set values are changed immediately before the set values are grasped. It is left as a display number. As a result, the final set value candidate becomes the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, since the game setting value which is advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the setting value, the joy when the setting value is grasped is improved.

  Regardless of the set value, it is conceivable to set so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed is easy to select. Conversely, it is conceivable to set so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) becomes earlier is easy to select. As described above, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set values is delayed, so that the higher set values are displayed later. This makes it possible for the player to expect the possibility of a high setting value that is advantageous to the player until immediately before the player grasps the setting value. (Set value) can be estimated and enjoyed.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter updating process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stopped symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stopped symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by one. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341. The counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is being changed, that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has been completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (Step S2101: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S2102. On the other hand, if no command has been received (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2101 and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when the command has been processed. It is memorized.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decoration symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38A), the variation type table (see FIG. 38B), and the effect type table (see FIG. 38B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance. The variation pattern is determined based on the effect type counter value stored in the RAM 512 and FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (C). Further, when the fluctuation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R certain variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R positive jackpot, Is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 39 (A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 39 (B)), and special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39 (C)) is included.

  Here, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341 is determined. FIG. 38 (A) shows a symbol combination in which the decorative symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probable jackpot (either 5R probable jackpot or 16R probable jackpot), and “777”. "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and that the zoro eyes other than" 333 "and" 777 "are either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variable jackpot. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is "5R normal big hit", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R regular jackpot”, the symbol combination of “333” or “777” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot or the 16R probability change jackpot (probability change jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, “7” is not assigned as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined at a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates the 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. If the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and if a decorative symbol other than “3” other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 determines that the 5R probable jackpot is a jackpot game. The specified 5R probable change promotion effect is executed.

  Further, when the lottery result is “16 probable jackpot”, there is a distribution to all the decorative symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is performed at a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probable jackpot", the symbol display combination display other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates the 5R probable jackpot or the 5R regular jackpot is stopped and displayed. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probable big hit is a big hit game.

  Then, when determining the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols "1" to "9". Is done. When the lottery result is “missing” and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 14D) and the first stop symbol determined earlier. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, in the case where the out-of-off type is out-of-reach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the disengagement type is reach other than the disengagement, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. The pattern is determined. In addition, when the departure type is completely departed, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 38B is a diagram illustrating an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach effect pattern”. In addition, the fluctuation display command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the fluctuation pattern is “02” is associated with the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “super reach effect pattern”. In addition, the fluctuation display command “C03” in which the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and the fluctuation pattern is “03” is associated with the fluctuation display time “90 s” and the fluctuation type “special reach effect pattern”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The fluctuation pattern command “D05” whose result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

  Further, FIGS. 39A to 39C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 39 (B) is the final normal effect effect type in the variable game effect. FIG. 39C is a super reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 39C is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect. It is a special reach effect pattern type selection table.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the effect types corresponding to the respective variation types are five, but the effect types may be six or more. In FIG. 39, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R regular jackpot, 5R probability change jackpot, 16R probability change jackpot, and miss). Are defined as “effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X5”. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are effects in which a normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in a reach state is performed after the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed, for example. This is an effect in which the final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

  In the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (B), “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Have been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super-reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Choose from a table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, a normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type has a larger jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super-reach production that is expensive and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that evolves into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (C), “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Have been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Choose from a table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and further, the normal reach effect and the super effect as the final individual effect types. This is a production that has a higher jackpot expectation than reach production, and develops into a special reach production that has a longer production execution time than normal reach production. Note that the special reach effect pattern type selection table includes a special reach effect pattern that evolves into a special reach effect without passing through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, such as after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect. May be.

  Then, the MPU 51 stores, in the RAM 512, a change pattern command, a change type table, an effect type table, and a stop pattern combination of decorative symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and a display change pattern command indicating the change type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed based on the variable display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the combination of the stop symbol of the decoration symbol and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) in the symbol display unit 341 and determines the command. The process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decoration symbol determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, in the ROM 611 of the display control device 6, a variation image of a decorative symbol, an effect image, and the like corresponding to each display variation pattern command are stored. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of the stop symbol of the decoration symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a predetermined variable display time elapses, and The change of the decoration design is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the decorative symbol, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. .

  Also, when outputting the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation game effect in-progress flag to ON. The variable game effect flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that a big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (Step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (Step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening / closing execution mode effect performed in the big hit game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting a jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making a decision.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that a round game in the open / close execution mode is to be started, and is set when a round game is started in the big hit game control process in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310), and ends the command determination processing. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start a round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (Step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (Step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and the main timer shown in FIG. This is set in the sensor detection processing of step S1001 in the interruption processing. Here, if the received command is a special out-of-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out-of-ball detection command (step S2113: No). The process moves to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 40 described below.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the big hit game is started, and is set in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2116. If the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. The ending effect start flag is referred to in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40 when determining whether to move the stopper 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. You.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command for ending the big hit game, and is set in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process Shifts to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and determines whether to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Is referred to when judging. In addition, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 when determining whether to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a set value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. . Here, if the received command is a set value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2120, and if the received command is not a set value change command (step S2119: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command determination process. The setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG. 35, and are referred to to determine the display order of the numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect process (step S2003) of the sub timer interrupt process, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when a variable pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. A variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game production process]
In the jackpot game effect process of the sub timer interrupt process (step S2004), the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In the present embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending additional image indicating a display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of the sub timer interrupt process (step S2005), the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is controlled, and the turning on and off of each of the segments A to G of the seven segment display portion 39 is controlled. Is done. Further, in the setting value suggestion process, as the ending effect of the jackpot game, a process of causing the symbol display unit 341 to display an ending additional image indicating a display result of the jackpot game on the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206. Move to

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. Accordingly, when the game ball 99 is staying in the staying lane 381 of the game ball staying section 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 moved from the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper moving down flag indicating that the stopper 383 is moving down. (Step S2203). The stopper moving-down flag is referred to in step S2206 in order to determine whether or not it is a timing at which a game ball (special out ball) retained in the retaining lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 returns to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets an ending effect start flag to off (step S2205). The setting value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S2206>
If the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopper moving-down flag set on in step S2203 is set on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is a timing at which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retaining lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2207 when the stopper moving-down flag is on (step S2206: Yes), and executes the processing when the stopper moving-down flag is off (step S2206: No). The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper moving-down flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out-of-ball detection flag is set on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2208. When the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. (Step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls entering the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to in controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the later-described seven-segment display unit control processing of FIG.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

  Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is determined as to whether or not a special out ball is detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. You may judge by. If the condition that the special out balls are not detected for a certain period is a condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. .

  Here, when the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2212, and when the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), The setting value suggestion processing ends.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper 383 of the game ball staying part 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns on in step S2203. The set lowering flag of the stopper portion is set to off (step S2213). Thereby, the game ball staying section 38 is returned to a state where the game balls 99 can stay in the stay lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the turning-on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the MPU 51 determines, for each jackpot game, the ending of the jackpot game after the elapse of the specific period according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball 373 of the clune device during the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Then, a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling turning on / off of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process of displaying the additional image corresponding to the light-off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the big hit game. By this ending addition image control processing, the turning-on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be confirmed also on the symbol display unit 341. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper moving-down flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect ending flag is set on (step S2216). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the big hit game effect (ending effect) based on the big hit game effect end flag. Here, when the big hit game production end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2217, and when the big hit game production end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting is made. The value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S2217>
When the big hit game production end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G that are lit on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G on the seven-segment display unit 39 when the big hit game effect is finished. In other words, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

  Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, game setting values (non-game setting values (setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is a big hit are set. All or a part of the number corresponding to (set value) is displayed. Therefore, every time a jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating a non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game. This allows the player to specify or estimate the non-set value each time the jackpot game is executed, and thus can enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information that can specify or estimate a non-set value for each jackpot game, if the number of jackpot games increases, for example, if the number of jackpots increases, all (five) non-set values are grasped. In this case, it is possible to grasp the set value. That is, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, it is possible to estimate the set value in the big hit game, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Further, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag or 5R normal jackpot flag) to off (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display unit control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process in FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display unit control processing, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. (Step S2301), it is determined whether or not the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (Step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning opening 316 and entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No). Since there is no need to turn on any of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39, the seven-segment display unit control process ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads out the segment display unit control information from the seven-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42A) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out-ball mouth 373 of the clune device 37 is accumulated). . Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. Is determined (step S2304), and the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed based on the control contents (step S2305). The details of the determination and control of the control content for the seven-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), and the 7-segment display unit control processing ends.

  Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and FIG. 42B is an example of a control order storage area of a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of an initial state (not updated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42 (B) and a displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42 (C).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the control order storage area stores the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period (a period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out-ball mouth 373 of the clune device 37 is accumulated). This is an area for storing the order of numbers to be displayed and the control target order of the segments A to G when displaying each number. The control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

  The number display order storage area stores the seven-segment display section 39 and the display area during the predetermined period (for example, from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot). And the order of the numbers to be displayed (number display order) is stored. The number display order is based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) set for the set value that defines the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit, and the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above. Is determined. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42B, the display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table in the case of the set value 1 in the above-described number display order setting processing, and 7 in the predetermined period is set. "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" is stored as the display order of the numbers on the segment display section 39. That is, as long as the setting is not changed during the operation of the gaming hall, a fixed order is determined for each business day as the number display order, and the number display order for a predetermined period during the same business day is fixed. . In this way, the number display order in the predetermined period on the business day is fixed, and the number is displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display unit 39 every time the predetermined period is started. Numbers in the early numerical display order are easily displayed, and numbers in the late numeric display order are difficult to display. For example, if the number display order is “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6”, the numbers are displayed in this order, so “2” and “3” are easily displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to display “5” or “6”. Thus, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily specified while enabling the set value to be estimated and specified, and to enjoy the guess and the specified value. Also, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers in the early number display order are easy to be displayed, and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to be displayed, for example, when the setting value is low setting. (In the case where the jackpot probability is low in the low probability mode), it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized that the setting is low with a small number of initial hits. As a result, the player is prevented from ending the game at the gaming machine 10 during the game early, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is expected that the greater the number of the specific period in the predetermined period (the greater the number of jackpots), the larger the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, as the number of jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can specify a plurality of non-set values other than the set value also increases. As a result, since the number of jackpots increases, a large amount of information for specifying the non-set value can be obtained, so that the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, the player can specify all non-set values by causing 35 or more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period, and as a result, recognizes the set values. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming at specifying all the non-set values, that is, recognizing the set values. Or a normal jackpot), the player can enjoy the progress of the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The number display order is not limited to the case where the number is set to the value set when the game machine 10 is turned on or when the setting is changed, but the case where a big hit game for a big hit (initial hit) in the low probability mode is started. May be determined. In this way, when the big hit game such as the first hit is started, the number display order is determined, and thus, for example, the number display order is determined every predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the number display order, so that the variation in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is reduced. Therefore, all the non-set values can be specified with a small number of initial hits, and the set values can be recognized early. As a result, the player is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the numbers previously displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 for the purpose of identifying all the non-set values and recognizing the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that no numbers will be displayed.

  On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of the segments A to G when displaying numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed to segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. In other words, the segment control order is not determined by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, changing the setting, winning a jackpot, or the like, but is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10. As described above, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, so that the player can control the segments A to G when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. Thereby, even before the number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the player can grasp the number to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  The segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 or at the time of changing the set value, similarly to the number display order, while being determined for each business day. It is also conceivable to do so. In this case, it is more difficult to grasp the numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, as compared with the case where the segment control order is fixed as the order unique to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty until all the non-setting values are specified and the setting values are recognized. For example, when the setting value is low (when the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being early recognized that the setting is low. This prevents the player from ending the game at the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

  In addition, as described in a third embodiment described later, the segment control order is determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started) or the like. Is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (C), the already-displayed information storage area stores the numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period, the numbers being displayed, and the information on the segments A to G already controlled. Area. The already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

  The already-displayed number flag information is information on a flag indicating whether or not the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 1 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates 7-segment display for a predetermined period when set OFF. This indicates that the numeral 1 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 2 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates 7-segment display during a predetermined period when set OFF. This indicates that the numeral 2 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 3 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in the predetermined period. The number 3 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates 7-segment display for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the numeral 3 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 4 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. The number 4 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates 7-segment display for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the numeral 4 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 5 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. The number 5 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates the 7-segment display for a predetermined period when set OFF. This indicates that the numeral 5 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 6 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in the predetermined period. The number 6 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates 7-segment display for a predetermined period when set OFF. This indicates that the numeral 6 is not displayed in the section 39.

  The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is a display target number in the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The numeral 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to on, and indicates the number 1 for 7-segment display when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39. The numeral 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to on, and the number 2 is displayed for 7 segments when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to on, and the number 3 is displayed for 7-segment when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39. The numeral 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to on, and the number 4 is displayed for 7-segment when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39. The numeral 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and the number 5 is displayed for 7-segment when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39. The numeral 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when it is set to on, and the number 6 is displayed for 7-segment when it is set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target of the unit 39.

  The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-subjected flag, a segment C already-subjected flag, a segment D already-subjected flag, a segment E already-subjected flag, a segment F already-subjected flag, and a segment G already-subjected flag. including. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment A target flag indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment A has been set to OFF when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment B target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment B of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment B target flag indicates that the segment B has been controlled in the display control of the number to be displayed during a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment B has been set to OFF when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment C target flag indicates that the segment C has been controlled in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment C has been set to OFF when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment D target flag indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates the segment D when set OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been turned on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment E target flag indicates that the segment E has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment E has been set to OFF when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment F target flag indicates that the segment F has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the segment F has been set to off when set to off. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment G target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has been turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment G target flag indicates that the segment G has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment G has been set to OFF when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target.

  In the displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all the flags included in the displayed numerical flag information, the display target numerical flag information, and the existing target segment flag information are set to off. Here, the initial state is a state outside the predetermined period, that is, at the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot (initial jackpot) in the low-probability mode (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37). At the beginning of a predetermined period for accumulating "." In the present embodiment, all the flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are determined when the big hit type is 5R normal big hit in step S2405 in the ending addition image control process in FIG. 46 described later (step S2404: Yes). In other words, when the end of the predetermined period is a set normal jackpot, it is set to off (cleared).

  Here, FIGS. 43 to 45 are diagrams illustrating a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area and an example of updating the already-displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, an example of updating the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45 along with a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39.

  As described above, in the 7-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display 39 is controlled in the ending of the jackpot game according to the control. (Step S2305). Thereafter, each piece of flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

  The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined by the value of the special-out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 373). For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C), when the value of the special out ball counter is less than seven, the seven segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are displayed. Some of the segments are to be turned on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period is 5), the control order storage area When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all flags are turned off), the 7-segment display section 39 The five segments A to E are to be turned on and off. When the content of the control order storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B), since the numeral 2 is displayed first, the segment A is turned on and the segment B is turned on. Segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. For this reason, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the segment A, the segment B, and the segment A shown in FIG. 43B are changed from the completely unlit state (non-control state) in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. D and the segment E are changed to the partially controlled state in which they are lit.

  The change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the partial control state shown in FIG. 43 (B) may be performed all at once, or the segments A to E may be sequentially controlled and the segments A to E may be used. May be turned on or off in a stepwise manner. Further, when the segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control objects, the control target segments A to E may be clearly indicated as being controlled by blinking or the like. Of course, it is not always necessary to specify the segment to be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is completed, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 43A to the partial control state shown in FIG. 43B, the already-displayed information storage area is shown in FIG. From the initial state in which all the flags are set to off, the contents are updated to the contents shown in FIG. Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43B, with respect to the numeral 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E of the segments A to G are to be controlled. And the segments F and G are not to be controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), in the displayed number flag information, none of the numbers 1 to 6 is displayed, so that the number 1 already displayed flag, the number 2 already displayed flag, and the number 3 already displayed flag are displayed. , The numeral 4 already displayed flag, the numeral 5 already displayed flag, and the numeral 6 already displayed flag are all kept off. In the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 for which the five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. In the already displayed segment flag information, since the segments A to E are to be controlled, the segment A already flag, the segment B already flag, the segment C already flag, and the segment D already flag for the segments A to E are set. , And the segment E target flag are set to ON.

  When the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42 (C)), the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. When the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 during the specified period exceeds seven, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period is 10), the 7-segment display unit 39 , A total of 10 segments A to G are to be controlled. That is, in the 7-segment display section 39, the seven (all) segments A to G are turned on and off, so that the numbers in the first display order are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the second display is performed. Regarding the numbers in the order, the three segments A to C are to be controlled to turn on and off the second time. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (all the flags are set to OFF). ), The number 2 in the first display order is 2, so the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the seven-segment display unit 39, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are changed from the non-control state in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. Is turned on and the segments C and F are turned off to change to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. ) Is changed from the all segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed to the partial segment control state in which the segments A to C shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 44C, since the second displayed number is 3, the segments A to C are turned on.

  Note that a change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44A to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44B, and a change from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44B to a part shown in FIG. The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by sequentially turning on or off the segments A to G or the segments A to C. When the segments A to G or the segments A to C are sequentially turned on or off, the control target segment may be turned on or off to clearly indicate that control is being performed. Of course, it is not always necessary to specify the segment to be controlled.

  When the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is performed, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44A to the partial-segment control state shown in FIG. 44C via the all-segment control state shown in FIG. In this case, the already displayed information storage area is changed from the initial state in which all the flags shown in FIG. 42C are set to OFF to the contents shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B and finally to the state shown in FIG. The content is updated to the content shown in FIG. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (B), with respect to the numeral 2 initially displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, all the segments A to E of the segments A to G are to be controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45A, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all the already-processed flags for the segments A to G are set to ON. When all the existing flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the numeral 2 has been completed, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, and in the displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to off while the displayed number 3 flag is set to on. After that, in the already displayed segment flag information, all of the existing flags for the segments A to G are set to off. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, in the displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-used flag, the segment B already-used flag, and the segment C already-used flag for the segments A to C are set to ON. In other words, each time all of the already-displayed flag of the already-displayed segment flag information is set to ON (every time when the seven segments A to G are set as control targets), they are displayed in the already-displayed numeric flag information. The already-displayed flag for the number is set to ON, and the display target flag for the number that was displayed in the displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next displayable number is turned ON. Is set.

  As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled in accordance with the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, so that the jackpot in the gaming machine 10 can be used. All or a part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit is displayed. Thereby, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value based on the display content on the seven-segment display unit 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

  Incidentally, some gaming machines have a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, such as the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and the gaming hall side can select the setting value. In this case, the gaming hall desires to set a lower set value in order to lower the expected payout value. When the set value is set low, the player does not know that the set value is low, so that the player does not want to stop the game, so the set value is not known to the player. They tend to want to be gaming machines.

  On the other hand, in order to play a game on the gaming machine 10 having a higher expected value of a ball, the player can guess the setting value (narrow down to a plurality of setting values) or recognize the gaming machine having the setting value. I want a good game. As described above, there is a tendency that the gaming hall and the player desire to contradict each other with respect to the gaming machine which suggests or specifies the game setting value.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the specific period from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, of the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning opening 316, the special operation of the cloon device 37 is performed. The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball mouth 373 is retained in the retaining lane 381 of the gaming ball retaining portion 38. Then, the number of gaming balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retaining lane 381 after the elapse of the specific period is counted, and the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are controlled by the number corresponding to the counted number. I do. That is, as long as at least the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the game is not shifted to the jackpot game, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are neither controlled nor lit. Therefore, unless the game is shifted to the jackpot game, the set value is not estimated or recognized.

  Also, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, for example, one or two (about one for 10R of round game) for one 16R jackpot game. It is expected that the game balls 99 enter. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or estimate the non-set value by the seven-segment display unit 39 in one big hit. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays the open / close execution mode in the normal jackpot game after the start of the jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low-probability mode becomes a jackpot. In a predetermined period until the start), the control is performed in accordance with the total number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37. In other words, during the predetermined period, if the initial hit is a probable jackpot, the opening and closing of the normal jackpot game will not be terminated as long as the jackpot series in the high-probability mode continues as long as the normal jackpot is won. Continue until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, although the non-set value and thus the set value are not easy to recognize, the special out ball port 373 of the clune device 37 increases as the jackpot in the high probability mode continues. If a large number of game balls 99 are expected to enter, a non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and if 35 or more game balls 99 are entered in the special out ball opening 373 in a predetermined period, Non-set values (set values) can be specified reliably. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, information capable of estimating a set value according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, that is, the number of gaming balls entering the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period is provided. Since the expected value of the number of the game balls 99 entering the special out-of-mouth 373 is low in the single hit jackpot, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot casino, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the non-set value (set value) when the number of villas is small, but as the number of villas increases, the game ball to the special out ball opening 373 is increased. Since the expected value of the number of entering balls of 99 is increased, it is possible to reduce the difficulty in estimating the non-set value (set value). That is, in the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated by specifying or estimating a part or all of the plurality of non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. is there. As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the non-set value (set value) is more accurately set by the jackpot, while the set value is prevented from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), while meeting the demands of the store side. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the wishes of the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store and the player is provided.

  By the way, in a conventional slot machine, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed may display an image indicating or explicitly indicating a set value. The images suggesting or indicating the set values are displayed on, for example, a jackpot determination screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as an ART or AT, a continuation screen, an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Is done. More specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, a big screen such as a jackpot game end screen, or a default screen that does not suggest or specify a set value, or a certain probability that the value is equal to or more than a specific set value (for example, intermediate setting) Value (set value 4 to 6) or more), high set value (for example, set value 5 or 6), odd set value (for example, set value 1, 3, or 5), even set value (for example, For example, a screen is suggested or suggested that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6), that the setting value is not a specific setting value (for example, negative of setting value 1), that the setting value is the highest setting value (for example, setting value 6), and the like. .

  However, in the suggestion or specification of the setting value in the conventional slot machine, the probability that a default screen not suggesting or specifying the setting value is presented is set high so that the setting value is not easily specified or estimated, and the setting value is set. The probability that a screen to suggest or specify is presented is set low. In particular, the probability that the setting value is suggested or specified with respect to the setting value that is advantageous to the player or that the specific setting value is specified is set to be low. Also, the suggestion of an odd set value or an even set value tends to have low reliability. For example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Further, in the slot machine, although the suggestion or the indication of the high setting value is indicated or indicated, the suggestion or the indication of the denial of the high setting value (for example, the setting value 5 or 6) is not executed. No suggestion or clarification that the setting value is a setting value (for example, setting value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, the presentation of information disadvantageous to the player, which denies the high set value, is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the setting is made in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Information (a non-set value) for which a value can be estimated is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a number. That is, since the numbers of the non-set values are displayed one by one on the 7-segment display unit 39, a part of the non-set values can be specified or estimated, so that the set values can be estimated. Since all the non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, the set values can be specified.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value is basically different from the setting value suggestion or specification at a fixed rate as employed in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the. In the present embodiment, a non-set value (set value) is specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Also, this point is different from the conventional gaming machine in which the setting value is indicated or indicated at a constant rate in this point. Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of jackpots increases, the difficulty in specifying or estimating a part or all of the plurality of non-set values is reduced. Is different from suggesting or specifying the set value of.

  Then, in the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 to the special out ball opening 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Is displayed, so that the frequency at which the information for specifying the set value is presented does not decrease as in the conventional gaming machine, and as long as the predetermined period continues (the jackpot retreat continues. As long as the presentation of the information for specifying the non-set value (set value) is continued, the guess of the set value can be further enjoyed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied by the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all non-set values can be specified. In other words, regardless of the level of the non-set value, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the set value is suggested or specified in the conventional slot machine, even information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as negating the highest set value, is presented. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the set value, so that the game is continued in the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. Can be determined. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed so that the number display order is easily selected. Conversely, it is conceivable to set so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) becomes earlier is easy to select. As described above, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set values is delayed, so that the higher set values are displayed later. This makes it possible for the player to expect the possibility of a high setting value that is advantageous to the player until immediately before the player grasps the setting value. (Set value) can be estimated and enjoyed.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control processing, the MPU 51 in step S2401 updates various types of information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 in FIG. The already-displayed number flag information, the currently-displayed number flag information, and the already-displayed segment flag information are read out, and an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game is determined based on these pieces of information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image indicating the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image for which a non-set value can be specified or estimated (FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C)). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command for displaying the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending effect to the display control device 6. Thus, the symbol display unit 341 displays the additional image on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending effect.

  Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the big hit game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the first half of the ending in the probable variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is the screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the first half of the ending in the normal jackpot. It is an example. FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C) are screen examples (examples of setting value suggestion screens) of the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending in the probable variable jackpot game, the symbol display unit 341 clearly indicates that the mode is to be shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the probable variable jackpot game as the first half part of the ending effect. Is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending in the normal jackpot game, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (time saving mode) are displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the first part of the ending effect after the normal jackpot game ends. An image is displayed that clearly indicates that the process will proceed to. In the first half of the ending effect, an image indicating the number of jackpots and the number of balls to be played is displayed in addition to an image indicating a game mode to be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the second half of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image indicates a display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until one predetermined period ends. It includes five setting value suggestion images simulating a 7-segment display unit 39 on which a number corresponding to a non-setting value can be displayed. Specifically, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43A to the display state shown in FIG. 43B, as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the second half part of the ending effect. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44 (C) via FIG. 44 (B), as shown in FIG. 47 (B2). An additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44B and a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, when all five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 by the end of the predetermined period, each number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. The additional image including the setting value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the second half part of the ending effect. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47C, an image is displayed indicating that numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” have been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this case, it can be specified that the non-set value is “2” to “6”, and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is “1”.

  As described above, in the ending production of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the second half part includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39. It is displayed as an image. Therefore, in the ending of each big hit game, the player can check the information on the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the big hit game. As a result, when the user does not know that the information related to the non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, when he or she misses the display content on the seven-segment display unit 39, or when the past seven-segment display unit during the predetermined period, Even if the display contents at 39 are forgotten, the display contents at the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can specify or estimate the non-setting value in the ending based on the additional image indicating the display history of the seven-segment display unit 39 for each big hit game, and can recognize or estimate the setting value.

  It is a design matter whether or not an additional image indicating the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the ending effect of the jackpot game. In, it may be considered that the additional image is not displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As described above, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there is a number displayed in the past in a predetermined period, the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 first unless the number is stored or recorded. It becomes difficult to specify or guess the non-set value based on the given number, and to guess or recognize the set value. That is, by not displaying the additional image in the ending effect, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least the set value is not high. Can be prevented from being recognized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that has triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R regular jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. If the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2305. If the jackpot type is not 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: NO), the ending additional image control process To end.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: YES), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control processing. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area when the jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or the accuracy of estimation can be increased in a predetermined period. It is necessary to allow more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, the gaming hall has an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or estimated. In addition, it is possible to specify or guess the setting value at the opportunity of winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the guessing of the setting value is increased by the continuation of the probability change jackpot (jackpot casino), and in some cases, the setting value is increased. It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a gaming property that it becomes recognizable. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is a special situation, and the game is not ended during the high probability mode in the case of the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is a period from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. Thereby, even when the player who cannot know the timing (end of the predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated is advanced in the game, the non-set value (set value) is specified or set. The game is prevented from ending just before it can be guessed. Therefore, even if the player cannot know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated or recognized. In addition, a so-called hyena action of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated can be eliminated.

  Further, since the beginning of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low probability mode of the first hit, at least one time before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. Not only is the jackpot winning condition, but even if the predetermined period is started, the non-set value (set value) is high due to the high hurdle until the non-set value (set value) can be specified as described above. A certain number of game balls 99 are fired on the game board 31 until a certain number is speculated or specified, and a considerable number of jackpots are drawn. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (easiness of jackpot lottery) has reached a stage where it can be sufficiently judged. Thereby, when the player can guess or specify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the gaming machine 10 that is playing the game includes not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot lotteries. , It is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even when the set value is low, if the number of lotteries per unit hit is large, it is possible to determine that the game is to be continued with comprehensive consideration. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot lotteries is small, it may be possible to judge that the continuation of the game is to be abandoned in consideration of the overall situation.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 indicates a symbol in the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display unit 341. Therefore, in the ending of each big hit game, the player can check the information on the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the big hit game. As a result, when the user does not know that the information related to the non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, when he or she misses the display content on the seven-segment display unit 39, or when the past seven-segment display unit during the predetermined period, Even if the display contents at 39 are forgotten, the display contents at the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, for each big hit game, the player specifies or estimates a non-set value in the ending based on the additional image indicating the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, recognizes or estimates the set value, and proceeds with the game. You can enjoy.

  In the present embodiment, the display history of the seven-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game. It may be displayed on a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display history in the predetermined period may be displayed in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed, a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player causes a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 to display the display history in the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. May be displayed. In this way, by displaying the display history of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period on the symbol display unit 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past seven-segment display is performed. It is possible to confirm when the display contents of the unit 39 have been forgotten. This makes it possible to specify or estimate the non-set value based on the past display contents on the seven-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in a standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

  As described above, when the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, it is possible to confirm when the display contents on the past 7-segment display unit 39 have been forgotten. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in a standby state or the like, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 which is empty. Can be. That is, it is possible to specify or estimate a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person, thereby permitting so-called hyena action. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history in the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history in the predetermined period is restricted in the period other than the specified period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate a hyena act of specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the initial hit is a probable variable hit, a predetermined period is set from the start of the initial hit jackpot game to the normal jackpot game with respect to the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. The predetermined period may be set one for each big hit regardless of the big hit type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each of the jackpot games regardless of the initial hit or the consecutive play. In this case, the start time of the jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is started and the end time of the jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the number corresponding to the non-setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying the number corresponding to the non-setting value, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is In the case of, a non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 by displaying a numeral or alphabet corresponding to the non-set value, and the non-set value is explicitly indicated on the symbol display portion 341. A reach effect may be executed. As the non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, for example, it is conceivable to stop and display the decorative symbol with a solo number corresponding to the non-set value. As described above, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit, a number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the non-setting value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Executing the non-set value explicit reach effect that specifies the set value not only determines whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the variable game is a big hit, but also allows the player to perform the first special symbol display unit 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy a variable game by paying attention to a number or the like stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 363 and paying attention to a combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Also, when the non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative design of the number corresponding to the set value, the number is not aligned in the zoro eyes and is stopped and displayed as an outlier. It is also possible. For example, when the set value is 1, the decorative design can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666", but not at "111", and the decorative design is not displayed. If the value is 1, the reach will always be off. As described above, it is usually desirable that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed by the number of the solo pattern by not stopping and displaying the numbered eyes of the number corresponding to the set value. Since it is desirable that the stop display is not performed in the solo eyes, it is possible to enjoy the reach effect from a viewpoint different from the related art.

  In addition, the display of a number or the like corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 or the non-set value explicit reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing. Is also conceivable. By executing a display such as a number corresponding to a non-set value on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 or a non-set value explicit reach effect only at a specific timing as described above, The game can be enjoyed by focusing on the variable game executed at a specific timing.

  As the specific timing, for example, in a variable game executed in the probable change game state or the time reduction game state, a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 and the symbol display unit 341 May be notified of a big hit. In this way, by indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the variable game in the probable game state or the time reduction game state, the high frequency support mode is used to quickly hold the hold, and the probability change game state or the time reduction game state that tends to be monotonous You can enjoy floating games. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the certain-variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number range. For example, the predetermined number of times range is a case where the number of variable games executed after shifting to the probable changing game state is small (for example, 1 to 10) or large (for example, 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, etc.). ). That is, when a big hit occurs early after being shifted to the probable changing game state, or in a humble state where the number of variable games until the big hit becomes large, the non-set value may be specified or suggested. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly shown or suggested as a privilege for the jackpot early after the end of the jackpot game or as a remedy for the hammer. The predetermined number range is set when the number of variable games executed after the shift to the time-saving game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or immediately before the end of the time-saving game state (for example, 90 to 100 times). It can be set. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested as a privilege for the jackpot early after the end of the jackpot game or for the jackpot immediately before the end of the working hours.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in other embodiments described below, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. In addition, each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each big hit game executed in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the jackpot game for the initial jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open / close execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot). A specific period (a period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening / closing execution mode) is set, and a number satisfying a specific condition (the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 within the specific period) Of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) in the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set based on the 7-segment display unit 39. Has been described.

  By the way, when the specific period is set for each of the jackpot games executed in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of the extended villas are set in the jackpot casino. Set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or a part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times, the processing is executed first. If the specific information presented in the ending of the jackpot game is not stored or recorded, it is not possible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented in the ending of the jackpot game executed earlier. It becomes difficult. That is, when the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded on the seven-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is troublesome to accurately store or record the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39. As a result, It is also assumed that the player gives up specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the interest of the game by being able to specify or estimate the non-set value (set value) is lost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the above-described first embodiment, and one time for one predetermined period is determined based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Only once, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is presented. As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific information for specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Is presented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience in the case where the specific information is presented a plurality of times during the predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is solved. That is, in the present embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and the player There is no specific information to store or record. Thereby, the player can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information that is presented only once for one predetermined period. This eliminates the inconvenience of accurately storing or recording the specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interestingness is improved.

  In the example of the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot game to the normal jackpot. The specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball of the clune device. Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, but the display timing (specific period) of the specific information is set to one predetermined period. On the other hand, only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 only once after the predetermined period ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion processing, the 7-segment display unit control processing, and the ending additional image control processing are different from those of the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the audio ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process of the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (Step S2201: Yes), the setting value suggestion process of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 40). Unlike the jackpot game, on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R regular jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37. The vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 for receiving the game ball 99 and the process of counting the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball staying portion 38 during a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). . Thus, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 during the predetermined period is set. Is counted once.

  In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of the present embodiment, under the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is controlled, and the game ball stays for a predetermined period. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 staying in the unit 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display unit control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also performed. Based on the stopper moving-in-stop flag set on condition that the end of the predetermined period is set to 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203), the process is executed on condition that it is 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display unit control processing]
The 7-segment display control process according to the present embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal big hit game (when the open / close execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display unit control processing in the present embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display unit control processing (see FIG. 41) in the above-described first embodiment. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading out the control order of the 7-segment display unit control information and the already displayed information (see FIG. 42), the 7-segment display unit control is performed. The reading of only the information control order is executed (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is set only in the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. Since 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), it is not necessary to read the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending additional image control processing in the present embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control processing (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, but the first ending additional image control processing in the first embodiment described above. Step S2404 in the ending additional image control processing in the embodiment is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control processing of the present embodiment is executed when the 5R normal jackpot is triggered (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 48), it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. In step S2405, the already-displayed information storage area is initialized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information (number) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) only once for one predetermined period. ) Is presented in whole or in part. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be stored or recorded by the player. Thereby, the player can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information that is presented only once for one predetermined period. This eliminates the inconvenience of accurately storing or recording the specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interestingness is improved.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first embodiment are possible within an applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated after the elapse of the specified period (the ending of the jackpot game) based on the number of the specified conditions being satisfied in the specified period. All or a part of the specific information (numbers) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39. In the first embodiment described above, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the number corresponding to the non-set value as the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set value is changed. (See FIG. 36) has been described. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the case where the number display order when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed has been described.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as the specific information are determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the set values are changed (FIG. 36). ), The numbers are displayed in the same order unless the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is not changed, and each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The control order of the segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information is obtained than the specific information already presented, New specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, such as a jackpot game for a single hit, for example, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, a specific condition that is satisfied It is feared that interest in specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period and the specific period will decrease.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which the specific information is presented (the number display order and the segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which the specific information is presented when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. There is a possibility that new specific information can be obtained even when the number is small. Therefore, for example, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined number of times is small, such as a jackpot game for a single hit, whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period is satisfied. Interest can be given to the number of specific conditions, and also to specific information presented after the elapse of a specific period. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can specify or estimate a non-set value (set value) according to the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied. Become.

  The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, opening a jackpot game, opening / closing execution mode, or starting the ending of the jackpot game. Can be considered. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) every time the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the presentation order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, and thus the same specific information is prevented from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every time a jackpot game is executed. Thus, for example, the order in which the specific information is presented in the jackpot game can be made interesting, so that the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In addition, the predetermined conditions include winning a specific jackpot (for example, a jackpot in a probability variable jackpot, a regular jackpot, or a low probability mode), and a specific jackpot game (eg, a jackpot in a probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a low probability mode). It is conceivable that the opening of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode, or the start of the ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the number of times that the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced as compared to a case where the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or a jackpot game. For this reason, the possibility that new information is presented for the specific information presented earlier is reduced, and the difficulty in identifying all non-set values (specifying set values) is increased. , All non-set values can be prevented from being specified early (set values specified). Thus, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game at the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

  The predetermined condition may be that a predetermined period or a specific period starts or ends. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information is obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to give an interest to the presentation order of the specific information, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific effect is determined or executed as a variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to, for example, any of the non-reach effect and the reach effect. Typically, the specific effect includes a premium effect in which the jackpot or the probable jackpot of the variable game effect is determined. Furthermore, as a specific effect, it is conceivable that the decorative design is stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in the symbol display unit 341 in a specific combination. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at “777” on the symbol display portion 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach position such as “767”, a specific non-reach out-of-reach value such as “367” A temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that a development effect is performed when a development effect such as a super-reach effect or a special reach effect is performed as a reach effect, in addition to a case in which the stop effect is displayed at the (stop). Display) can be considered. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is to be executed, for example, as in “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display). It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" is to be executed is temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when the predetermined condition is set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) every predetermined period or every specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information is obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to give an interest to the presentation order of the specific information, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as the predetermined condition, it is also conceivable that the single hit is continuous a plurality of times, and the presentation order of the same specific information is continuous a plurality of times. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) in a situation where it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information. For this reason, new information is easily obtained as the specific information, so that the feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined condition that is satisfied first may be prioritized, and finally, The presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined condition that is satisfied may be prioritized.

  In an example of the present embodiment, a plurality of non-settings as specific information are set on condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, and a first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the values and the segment display order when each number is displayed are determined, and the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders. After the elapse), all or a part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to by the user. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on a display order setting process which is a difference from the first embodiment.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The big hit game effect start flag is a flag indicating that a big hit game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2602. If the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order is changed. The setting process ends.

<Step S2602>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the big hit is the first hit and the predetermined period is started. Whether the jackpot in the low-probability mode is, for example, whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is started is in the low-probability mode or in the high-probability mode Is included in the big hit game start command, and when the big hit game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio ramp control device 5, the command determination process of FIG. 37 is performed based on the probability mode information. It is possible to make a determination by setting a flag indicating a jackpot in the low probability mode to ON or OFF and confirming the flag by the MPU 51. Note that the probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

  Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2603 if the jackpot is the low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the jackpot is an initial jackpot (a jackpot at the beginning of a predetermined period). On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process when the jackpot is not the jackpot in the low probability mode (Step S2602: No), that is, when the jackpot is a jackpot in the high probability mode (Step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If the jackpot is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: YES), the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further displays the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39. (Step S2604), the control order of the segments A to G for each numeral is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

  Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is the same as that of step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Are determined based on the numerical display order determination table shown in FIG. The display order of the determined numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

  In addition, the control order of the segments A to G for each numeral is determined based on the control order determination table of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders of the segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt processing in FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. Probabilities are set equal. Then, the control order of the segments A to G is determined to be the same for each number from a plurality of control orders by the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. You. The control order of the determined segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

  In the present embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all the numbers. May be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to the non-set values.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined every predetermined period. Thereby, the order in which the specific information is presented when the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined, so that the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even when the number is small, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, for example, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined number of times is small, such as a jackpot game for a single hit, whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period is satisfied. Interest can be given to the number of specific conditions, and also to specific information presented after the elapse of a specific period. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the interest of the game by presenting the specific information in accordance with the number that satisfies the specific condition for specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value). .

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first and second embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number of the specific conditions being satisfied in the specific period, after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), the specific information (numerals) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values is obtained. The case where all or a part is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated with the end of the jackpot game has been described. That is, in the first embodiment described above, all or a part of the specific information is displayed in a predetermined period (after the specific period has elapsed).

  By the way, when the player has overlooked or forgotten the presentation of the specific information in the prescribed period, the player specifies the plurality of non-set values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. It is assumed that you want to reconfirm the information. In addition, when the player is replaced, it is assumed that the player after the replacement desires to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the prescribed period, the specific information is not presented during a period other than the prescribed period, so that the specific information cannot be reconfirmed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the specified period. As described above, since the specific information presented in the past during the special period other than the specified period can be presented, the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past during the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when the presentation of the specific information in the specified period is overlooked or forgotten, or when the player is replaced. The player can check the specific information presented to the past player. This allows the player to specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the past player. The convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

  Here, the special period includes, for example, a period of a standby state (customer waiting state) in which neither the variable game nor the big hit game is executed. Since the special period is the period of the standby state, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past in a state where the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various effects performed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like as the game progresses, for example, obstruction of visual recognition of a variable game effect or a big hit game effect.

  When all or a part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state can be presented, a predetermined input screen such as a password input operation or a command input operation is displayed on a specific display screen that can be shifted in the standby state. It is also conceivable to perform the operation. The password or the command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending or the like in a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, the password and the command are displayed by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the symbol display part 341 in the jackpot game and reading the matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. It may be possible to enter by a so-called mobile link transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

  As described above, on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, it is possible to present all or a part of the specific information that has been presented in the past during the standby state, Only a player who can enter a password or command, etc., that is, only a player who has presented all or a part of the specific information, confirms all or a part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state. Becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a so-called hyena action or free ride in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by another player.

  In addition, by reading a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone on a specific display screen that can be shifted in a standby state, all or a part of the specific information previously presented on the mobile terminal. May be presented.

It is also conceivable that the special period is set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, in the open / close execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game as described above, past specific information is presented in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not explicitly or suggested. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the result or the suggestion of the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. Also, the jackpot game tends to reduce the player's interest because it is performed after the result of the jackpot lottery by the variable game is clearly indicated as a jackpot, but such a jackpot game is presented in the past. By presenting the specific information, interest in the jackpot game is improved.

  Further, the special period may be set during a floating game. Here, in the total time during which the game is executed (the time excluding the time in the standby state from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is on), as a theoretical value, the fluctuation game is compared with the execution time of the jackpot fluctuation game. Execution time is longer. For this reason, since the past specific information can be presented during the variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which the past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, for a certain period before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state in which the reach effect is not performed as the variable game effect or when the fluctuation time is short, It is preferable to restrict the presentation of specific information. Thus, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the indication or suggestion of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stop display of the decorative symbol from being hindered.

  The presentation of the past specific information in the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 or may be executed according to the player's intention.

  When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, the past specific information can be presented at a timing not expected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with unexpected gaming properties. In addition, since the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without performing any operation on the gaming machine 10, even if the player has little knowledge of the gaming machine 10, Thus, it is possible to know the specific information presented in the past. Thereby, fairness among players is ensured.

  Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the past specific information presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, In the case where a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the above, presenting specific information presented in the past before the reach effect is executed at a fixed rate (including 100%), For example, it is determined that the specific information presented in the past is determined by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the jackpot game. When the specific information presented in the past as the demonstration screen in the standby state is presented, the player takes into account the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen and performs a gaming machine for executing the game from an empty space. Since it becomes possible to select the game machine 10, the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the gaming machine 10 for executing the game are improved. In addition, when a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a variable game, if the specific information presented in the past before the reach effect is executed is presented, the past specific information is not presented. Since it plays a role as a pre-announcement effect for the execution of the specific reach effect, the interest in the variable game is improved. In addition, the presenting of the past specific information in the variable game may be an expectation suggestion effect (including a definite effect indicating a jackpot) indicating an expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is also conceivable to execute it as a chance-up effect to improve the degree of expectation (reliability). Also in this case, interest in the variable game is improved. In the case where specific information presented in the past is presented by a lottery executed at a specific timing of a variable game or a jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at a random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, unexpectedness for the game can be particularly given. Also, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing. Is improved.

  On the other hand, when the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is performed by the player's intention, the special information is not passively waited for the presentation of the past specific information at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10. During the period, the player can positively check the past specific information at his / her favorite timing. Therefore, when specifying or estimating a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of past specific information, the timing of presenting the past specific information is reflected by the player's own intention without being limited by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, convenience is improved.

  Here, as an example in which the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is performed by the player's intention, in the special period set during the standby state, during the variable game, and during the big hit game, the operation button 20 is operated by the player. For example, when a predetermined operation is performed on, for example, the specific information presented in the past is presented.

  In an example of the present embodiment, all or a part of the specific information (numerals) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the ending (specified period) of the jackpot game is displayed, and the standby state is established. In the period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determining unit 21, all or a part of the specific information (numerals) displayed in the ending of the last three jackpot games is displayed. It is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In the example of the present embodiment, all or a part of the specific information previously displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. It is.

  Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determining unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

  The selection deciding unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts a pressing operation of the player in a standby state described later and shifts a display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) in various screens such as a top menu screen in a standby state screen transition process of FIGS. 61 and 62 described below. (See FIG. 60), and includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, the provisional selection means that the contents of the provisionally selected are determined (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. As shown in FIG. 54, each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 by an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch. 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input / output I / F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

  In this embodiment, when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is started, it is determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continued or that the operation is completed, it may be determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. .

  On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The determination button 21B includes a determination operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input / output I / F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation on the determination operation switch 21Ba has been performed based on the input signal of the determination operation switch 21Ba.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives a player's operation on the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel for receiving a player's operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial in place of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba are contact switches or the like, but may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player. .

  Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process performed by the audio ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interruption processing of the present embodiment, in addition to the processing (steps S2000 to S2005) similar to the sub-timer interruption processing of the above-described first embodiment, an operation detection processing ( Step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interruption process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection processing, the MPU 41 performs an operation button operation detection processing (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2802), a selection button operation detection processing (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection processing (step S2201 of the operation detection processing), processing for detecting the operation state of the operation button 20 and sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection processing is executed by the MPU 41, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, 1 msec interval) corresponding to the interruption cycle of the sub timer interruption processing. Will be determined. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901-S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and ends the operation detection processing.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection processing, the processing of steps S2901 to S2903 is executed, so that the operation states of the three most recent operations at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first detection flag to the third detection state. The flag is stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the immediately previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination processing of step S2802 in the operation detection processing, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38A). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started (see FIG. 38A). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed (see FIG. 38A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38A). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 59A is a table showing a relationship between a detection pattern for the operation button 20 and an operation state. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59A.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3002 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), and executes the processing when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No). It moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3003 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No). It moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3004 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No). The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and sets the second operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59A). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit the operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued, so that the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. We can grasp time. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. Can be executed.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A determination is made (step S3005). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3006 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No). The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3007 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No). The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off. That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59A), and the operation detection pattern determination processing ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When determining that the second operation detection flag is not on in step S3002 (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No). The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59A). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). it can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 59A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories for the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects an operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, and thus detailed description is omitted. Note that the left selection button operation processing may be obtained by replacing the “operation detection flag” with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, and thus detailed description is omitted. Note that the right selection button operation processing may be obtained by replacing the “operation detection flag” with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the upper selection button 211 based on the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, and The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as an operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, and The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc. occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the key 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  The MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is not operated.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. When this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

  The MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is not operated.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the right selection button 214. When this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

  The MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 for three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is not operated.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the determination button operation detection processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, and thus detailed description is omitted. Note that the determination button operation detection process may be replaced with “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. , An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the determination button 21B is set. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has generated “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” operation patterns as the three operation states of the determination button 21B. In this case, the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continued.

  In addition, when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to off. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been completed). .

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of three times of the determination button 21B, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags. Set to off. When all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the determination button 21B is in the non-operation state.

[Standby screen transition processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen shift processing executed in 2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing, in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the big hit game is executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the In response to the operation on the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 is shifted, and a process for enabling the player to make various selections and settings is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition on the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the change display of the decorative symbol is stopped, when the number of hold N and the number of hold M are “0” and the game does not shift to the jackpot game state, the change of the decorative symbol is stopped. The state change stop screen is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. The top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and a cursor image.

  The plurality of screen transition images are images for selecting a transition destination display screen, and include a plurality of selectable items (transition destination display screens). A plurality of screen transition images are displayed on a 7-segment display section history selection screen transition image for transition to a 7-segment display section history selection screen displayed as “7-segment display section history”, and a character selection displayed as “character selection” A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displayed as "character customization", and a fluctuation stop screen for transitioning to a "return" screen Includes a change stop screen transition image.

  The cursor image is an image indicating which of the selectable items is currently provisionally selected, and an item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed. The item is temporarily selected. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that “7-segment display section history” is provisionally selected. Further, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item of the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize that the screen transition image is temporarily selected. . The change of the temporary selection item can be executed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

  On the top menu screen, the item (temporary display screen) temporarily selected is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen is shifted to the display screen corresponding to the item. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the player has selected the 7-segment display section history selection screen transition image of “7-segment display section history”, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Will be migrated to.

  The seven-segment display unit history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen in which the content of the specific information displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the last three predetermined periods, and displays the contents of the specific information for the immediately preceding predetermined period one time before the history screen And a second previous history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period two times before is displayed, and a three-times previous history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period three times before are displayed. Each history screen is a history image in the same form as the additional image (see FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game. including. The history image shows the display history on the seven-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five settings simulating the seven-segment display unit 39 on which a number corresponding to a non-set value can be displayed. Includes a value suggestion image. In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period immediately before, the segments A to A are displayed. C indicates that it has a lighted history.

  The 7-segment display section history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating that the tentative selection has been made, and a previous history screen for shifting to a previous history screen displaying “history 1 (previous)”. Transition image, two-time history screen transition image for transition to the two-time history screen displayed as “history 2 (two times before)”, three times before displayed as “history 3 (three times before)” It includes a three-time previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displayed as “end”. Then, on the 7-segment display section history selection screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (display screen of the transfer destination) is determined, and the display screen is shifted to the display screen corresponding to the item. For example, if the enter button 21B is operated when the previous history screen transition image of “history 1 (one time before)” is provisionally selected by the player, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to 1 Moves to the previous history screen. When “History 2 (2 times before)” is selected, the screen is shifted from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen, and when “History 3 (3 times before)” is selected. Is shifted from the seven-segment display part history selection screen to the three-time previous history screen. When “end” is selected, the screen is shifted from the seven-segment display section history selection screen to the top menu screen.

  In this way, it is possible to shift from the seven-segment display part history selection screen to any one of the one-time previous history screen, the two-time previous history screen, and the three-time previous history screen by the selection of the player. That is, the player can confirm the history information desired by himself / herself by shifting to the history screen desired by himself / herself. As a result, the history can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of the history information such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information, so that the history can be confirmed efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, information for specifying the non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 different from the symbol display unit 341 on which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, the visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the ending is displayed on a symbol display unit 341 different from the seven-segment display unit 39. Here, in general, since the symbol display unit 341 has a large display area, displaying the history information on the symbol display unit 341 improves the visibility of the history information. In addition, the symbol display unit 341 may be used for performing various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the ending are displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is possible to confirm the history information by the same operation as the operation for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of checking the history information is improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by a player, but it is also conceivable that a plurality of history information is simultaneously displayed on one screen. In this case, since many histories can be confirmed at a time, the presentation contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

  In the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of “Character selection” is selected, the display screen is shifted to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of “Character customization” is selected, the display is performed. The screen is shifted to a character customization screen. That is, in the present embodiment, a character appearing in a floating game effect or the like can be selected, and the character's costume, accessory, hairstyle, and the like can be customized.

  In the case where the “return” change stop screen shift image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen shifts to the change stop screen.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) in the standby state, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods is confirmed. Can be. Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are overlooked or forgotten at the ending of the jackpot game, and The player after the replacement in the case of the replacement can check the display contents of the past seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to specify or estimate a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39. The convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. Hereinafter, the procedure of the standby state screen shift processing executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen shift processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the apparatus is in the standby state (Steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effect in-progress flag set to on in step S2105 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 to off (step S3101: No), and sets the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. In the case of transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the big hit game rendering process of step S2004, if the big hit game rendering flag that is set to on is set to off (step S3102: No), the standby state is set. Judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in the standby state when the fluctuating game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). Judge.

  If the MPU 51 is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3103, and if not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), ends the standby state screen shift processing. .

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is a fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 when the transition is made from the fluctuation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to off in the standby state. Is set to on in step S3120. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when a transition from a display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen to the fluctuation stop screen is made. Specifically, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109 of FIG. 62 described below, the display screen is changed in the one-time previous history screen processing in step S3113. Is changed from the previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen, when the display screen is changed from the twice previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the twice previous history screen processing in step S3115, and in step S3117. Also set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the three-time previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-time previous history screen processing. The fluctuating stop screen flag is set to off in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuating stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to off when fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3104, and when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). Then, the process shifts to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation button 20 when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (FIG. 60). reference). That is, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets a fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Step S3108>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to on Is determined (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3109. The process moves to S3110.

<Step S3109>
When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the items that are temporarily selected are changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item provisionally selected when an operation is performed on the enter button 21B, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display unit history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character selection screen Move the display screen to the customization screen. When the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the screen of the shift destination to on, and sets the top menu screen flag to off.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is a 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to on Is determined (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen processing is processing executed when the 7-segment display section history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3112>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. You. When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3113, and when the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112). S3112: No), the process moves to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen processing and ends the standby state screen transition processing. In the previous history screen processing, when “return” is selected, the display screen is shifted from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the one-time previous history screen flag to OFF, and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the twice previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the twice previous history screen is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3114). The two-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the two-time previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. You. If the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3115, and if the second previous history screen flag is set OFF (step S3114). S3114: No), the process moves to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second previous history screen processing and ends the standby state screen transition processing. In the second previous history screen processing, when “return” is selected, the display screen is shifted from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the seven-segment history selection screen flag to ON while setting the two-time previous history screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3116>
If the second previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the third previous history screen is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3116). The six-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display part history selection screen to the three-time previous history screen in step S3217 of the seven-segment history selection screen processing of FIG. You. If the three-time history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3117, and if the three-time history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3117). S3116: No), the process moves to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the three-time previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the three-time previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the third previous history screen processing, when “return” is selected, the display screen is shifted from the third previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the seven-segment history selection screen flag to ON while setting the three-time previous history screen flag to OFF.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
When the history screen flag three times before is set to off (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to on. (Step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: YES), other screen processing corresponding to another screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flag is set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to on (step S3120), and ends the standby state screen shift processing. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state and all the screen flags are off, the MPU 51 shifts from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, and can determine that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Set the stop screen flag to on.

[7-seg history selection screen processing]
In the seven-segment history selection screen processing executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen shift processing, the display screen is changed to the seven-segment display part history in response to an operation on the selection determining unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) by the player. The process of shifting from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the second previous history screen, or the third previous history screen is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen shift process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the upper selection button 211 has been started, and the upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process moves to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the upper side. Execute. For example, if “History 2 (2 times before)” is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display changes to “History 1 (1 time before)”. (See FIG. 60). In addition, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is performed when the “history 1 (one time before)” displayed at the top of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display is not changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3201: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the lower selection button 212 has been started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process moves to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: YES), the MPU 51 changes the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the lower side. Execute For example, if “History 2 (2 times before)” is tentatively selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the tentative selection display is changed to “History 3 (3 times before)”. (See FIG. 60). In addition, when the operation on the lower selection button 212 is performed when “End” displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed. The provisionally selected display may be changed to “history 1 (one time before)” displayed at the top of the images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the determination button 21B has been started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination processing executed in step S2806 in the operation detection processing of FIG. You. That is, when the display screen is the seven-segment display unit history selection screen, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation on the enter button 21B has been performed. When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3206). S3205: No), the standby state screen shift processing ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: YES), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and temporarily selects when the determination button 21B is operated. It is determined whether or not the selected item is “end” (step S3207). When the item that has been temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3208, and temporarily determines when the determination button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not “end” (step S3207: No), the process moves to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the temporarily selected item is “end” when the determination button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen shift processing.

<Step S3210>
If the temporarily selected item is not “end” when the determination button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time before)”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S3210). When the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time before)” (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3211 and changes the temporarily selected item to “history 1 (one time before)”. If not) (step S3210: No), the process moves to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is “history 1 (one previous time)” (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the seven-segment display part history selection screen to the one-time previous history screen (step S3210). S3211) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3212), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

<Step S3213>
If the temporarily selected item is not “History 1 (one time before)” when the determination button 21B is operated (Step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is “History 2 (2 Is determined (step S3213). When the temporarily selected item is “history 2 (two times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3214, and changes the temporarily selected item to “history 2 (two times before)”. If not) (step S3213: No), the process moves to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the item that has been temporarily selected is “history 2 (two times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the two-time previous history screen (step S3213). S3214) (see FIG. 60), the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3215), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the temporarily selected item is not “history 2 (two times before)” when the determination button 21B is operated (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is “history 3 (3 ), The display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display section history selection screen to the three-times previous history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), and the three-times previous history screen flag is set to ON. Then (step S3217), the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

  As described above, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen shifts from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any one of the previous history screen, the second previous history screen, and the third previous history screen. The plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in accordance with the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out port 373 of the clune device 37 for the past three predetermined periods. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are overlooked or forgotten at the ending of the jackpot game, and The player after the replacement in the case of the replacement can check the display contents of the past seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to specify or estimate a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39. The convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

  In particular, in the standby state, the display screen is displayed on the history screen (one-time previous history screen) unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation unless the floating game is executed by launching the game ball 99. The screen is not shifted to another screen such as the fluctuation stop screen from the second history screen and the third history screen. Therefore, the player stops the launch of the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subjected to time restrictions such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the ending of the jackpot game. Thus, it is possible to check the specific information displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the past at a self-paced time, carefully and carefully. Thereby, when the player specifies or estimates a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, the player can consider at his own pace. Convenience for specifying or estimating (set value) is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation (intention) of the player in the standby state is determined by the past three predetermined periods. However, the number of past specific information that can be displayed is not limited. That is, it may be possible to confirm the specific information for a predetermined period of one time, two times, or four times or more in the past.

  The display of the past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341 and may be performed by another display unit as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or provided separately from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, to display past specific information. It may be a display unit. In addition, if there is a display unit provided to execute a part of an effect such as a floating game effect, separately from the symbol display unit 341, past information may be displayed on the display unit. Conceivable.

  Further, in this embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to third embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number at which the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, after the specific period has elapsed (ending of the jackpot game), each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) corresponds. The case where all or a part of the specific information is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 and the presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated with the end of the jackpot game has been described. That is, in the first embodiment described above, every time the specific period set to the predetermined period elapses, the specific information is displayed in the specified period set after the elapse of the specific period.

  By the way, when a number corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are to be controlled. Setting value) can be specified. Further, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when segments A to G are to be controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target, segment A, is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When the sixth control target segment F is turned on, it can be recognized as “4”, and when the segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as “1”. That is, the numeral “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are the control targets, has been the control target. When the first control target segment A is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. When the segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that the segment B is either “2” or “3”. When the segment B is turned off, “5” and “3” are set. 6 ". Furthermore, it can be recognized as “3” when the third control target segment C is turned on, and can be recognized as “2” when the segment C is turned off. That is, the numeral “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control targets, becomes the control target. Further, the segment E, which is the fifth control object, can be recognized as “6” when the segment E is turned on, and can be recognized as “5” when the segment E is turned off. In other words, the numeral “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G become the control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers “1” and “4” can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off.

  However, in the above-described first embodiment, after all the segments A to G have been controlled, the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed. Therefore, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are to be controlled, the next display is performed after all the segments A to G are not to be controlled. Control of segments A to G for displaying the target number is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the next number to be displayed is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player is displayed in the seven-segment display unit 39. May be displayed during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled in the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game elapses. All or a part of the numbers (specific information) are dispensed every time a specific period elapses. Therefore, when a number corresponding to any of the non-set values is displayed in the specific period that has elapsed earlier, the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or estimate a set value from a plurality of non-set values.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a plurality of information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or more than the number of non-set values (five), each information display unit Displays information (numbers) for specifying the non-set value. Each information display unit has two modes, a display state in which specific information is presented (lighting state) and a non-display state in which no specific information is presented (light-out state). The non-set value can be specified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. By setting the information display unit in one of the two states of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after the specific information that can specify one non-set value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, and unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

  The non-set value display means is not particularly limited. For example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, Examples include a matrix display and a plasma display. In addition, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means in which decorative symbols are variably displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display units corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is set to the display state, and at least the specific period until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. In this case, the information display section previously set to the display state is set to the display state. For example, an information display unit that has been in a display state in a specific period earlier in the same predetermined period is also in a display state in a specific period after the predetermined period. As described above, the information display unit that has been in the display state in the specific period earlier in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that the But you can check. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient to specify a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, and thus to specify or infer the setting value. The performance is improved.

  In addition, the information display unit that is in the display state in the specific period may be maintained in the display state at all times until the end of the jackpot game in which the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

  In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp display units to which any one of numbers from 1 to 6 is attached, a game ball enters the special out ball of the clune device in a specific period. The individual lamp display with the number corresponding to the non-set value at the stage of winning the lamp lighting lottery without having to wait for the elapse of a specific period by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when it is done The part is turned on. In the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment. FIGS. 69 to 71 are views showing modified examples of the present embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on / off the lamp display unit 35.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharging section 38A instead of the gaming ball staying section 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the above-described first embodiment. Instead of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the embodiment, a lamp display unit 35 is provided on the game board 31.

  The special out ball discharging section 38A discharges the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. The special out ball discharging portion 38A has a configuration in which the stopper portion 383 is omitted from the game ball retaining portion 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the game ball retaining portion 38 is omitted except that the stopper portion 383 is omitted. It has the same configuration as In such a special out ball discharging section 38A, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharging section 38A. Is done. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the elapse of the specified period as in the first embodiment, but is during the specified period. However, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball 373.

  The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information for specifying a non-set value, and includes a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually turned on and off. including. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (line) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Thus, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 can be individually turned on and off.

  The first individual lamp unit 351 is provided with the numeral 1 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is a game setting value 1 when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 1 is negated. The second individual lamp unit 352 is provided with the numeral 2 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is the game setting value 2 when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 2 is denied. The third individual lamp unit 353 is provided with the numeral 3 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is a game setting value 3 when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 3 is denied. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is provided with the numeral 4 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is a game setting value 4 when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 4 is denied. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is provided with the numeral 5 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is a game setting value 5 when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 5 is denied. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is provided with the numeral 6 and one of the plurality of non-setting values is a game setting value 6 when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned on, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 6 is denied.

  That is, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers assigned to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set values corresponding to the numbers are denied as set values. You. When the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The numbers corresponding to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the state correspond to the set values.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are 2 to 5. 6 and that the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351 and 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual unit lamp 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1, 3 to 6, and it is specified that the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66 (C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual unit lamp 353 is turned off, It is specified that the set value is 1, 2, 4 to 6, and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66D, when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, It is specified that the set values are 1-3, 5, and 6, and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66 (E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 4 and 6, and it is specified that the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66 (F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 5, It is specified that the value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion processing of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are executed. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value according to the lighting state or the light-off state of. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the setting value suggestion processing of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are executed. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value according to the lighting state or the light-off state of. Hereinafter, the procedure of the setting value suggestion process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, if the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and if the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3311. Move to

<Step S3302>
If the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S3302: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3303. If the special OUT ball detection flag is OFF (step S3302: NO), the MPU 51 performs the setting. The value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S3302: YES), that is, if it is detected that the game ball 99 has been thrown into the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on. A lamp lighting lottery to determine whether or not to light is performed. That is, each time the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. This makes the set value recognizable. Then, in the seven-segment display unit 39, in order to display five numbers, it is necessary to control the seven segments A to G five times at a time, so that the specific condition is 35 times (7 × 5 times). ) That is, it is necessary to allow 35 game balls 99 to enter the special out port 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. And the light is turned off only in two modes. Therefore, in order for the lamp display unit 35 to display five non-set values so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition may be satisfied five times or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the same clown device 37 as that of the above-described first embodiment is employed. Therefore, when specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 for displaying non-set values are set. It is clear that the light is turned on with a small number of jackpots.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the fact that the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37, , A condition that the player wins the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in satisfying the specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Thereby, the difficulty level of turning on the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, it is prevented that the set value is easily recognized.

  The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery indicates that the difficulty level for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 indicates five numbers by the seven-segment display unit 39 in the above-described first embodiment. Is set to be the same or substantially the same as the degree of difficulty for The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or may be the same for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from the other individual lamp units 351 to 356.

  If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, a gaming property is provided in which the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values are lit is stabilized. You. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 × (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). Is done. This is because, in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 are thrown into the special out port 373 of the clune device 37, In the present embodiment as well, about seven individual ball units 351 to 356 are turned on on average when seven game balls 99 are put into the special out ball 373. When the same winning probability is set in the lamp lighting lottery for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and is appropriately determined. Can be changed.

  In addition, the lottery condition which triggers the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the plurality of non-set values is a special condition of the cloon device 37. When it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out ball mouth 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the difficulty of establishment of the lottery condition. That is, when the difficulty of establishment of the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be low, and as the difficulty of establishment of the lottery condition becomes higher, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is considered to be set higher. Can be By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the difficulty level of the lottery condition, the difficulty level of the specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is determined. Irrespective of the condition type. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (accurately as a chance of a lottery).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, a game having a variation in the probability of lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value is provided. Is imparted. When the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, it is conceivable that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having a later control order have a lower winning probability. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having the earlier control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305. If the MPU 51 has not won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the set value processing. .

<Step S3305>
When the winning in the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: YES), the MPU 51 reads out the already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

  Here, the already-lit lamp information is information on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are being lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information as shown in FIG. 68 (B) and FIG. 68 (C). The already-lit lamp flag information includes a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned on, and a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on. , A third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, a fifth individual lamp unit A fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit, and is set to OFF when the individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (C), the second already-lit lamp flag is set to on, the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to off, and the second individual lamp unit 352 is set. Is turned on, indicating that the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are on. When all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, when all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, there is no other individual lamp unit 351 to 356 to be lit, and the setting value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, if there is an already-lit lamp flag set to off in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If the already-lit lamp information includes an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order (lamp control order) of the individual lamps (step S3307).

  Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by the same procedure as the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the set value stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above. If the numbers in the number display order determination table are considered as the numbers assigned to the individual lamps, Good. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351. Similarly, the number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above. Numerals 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the set value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is changed from the second individual lamp unit 352 to the third individual lamp unit 352. The lamp unit 353 → the fourth individual lamp unit 354 → the fifth individual lamp unit 355 → the sixth individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the numeral display order determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display order is selected is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table in the present embodiment, each lamp control order is selected. Are the same.

  Note that the lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period starts. Also, the ramp control order need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308). The lamps 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on when this lamp lighting lottery is won. Specific information indicating a non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion processing. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (C), the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp section 352 is set to ON.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lamp lighting lottery is executed each time the game ball 99 enters the special out port 373 of the clune device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 351 are executed. The non-set value can be specified by turning on 356. That is, in the present embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by turning on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. By setting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in one of the two states of the lighting state and the extinguishing state, the non-set value can be specified by the number assigned to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lighting state. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after the specific information that can specify one non-set value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, and unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

<Step S3311>
If the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the big hit game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. If the jackpot game effect ending flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3312, and if the jackpot game effect ending flag is off (step S3311: No), the set value The suggestion processing ends.

<Step S3312>
If the big hit game production end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the big hit type to be ended is the 5R normal big hit (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. If the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3313. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether any of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 is lit, if any. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the already-lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the setting value suggestion process ends. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off when the end of the predetermined period is set to the 5R normal jackpot. Thereby, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in the lit state until the 5R normal big hit game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time until the end of the 5R normal big hit game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, that is, the specific information for specifying the non-set value can be confirmed. . For this reason, the specified information presented earlier in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience in specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specified information, and thus in specifying or estimating the set values is improved. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 and the lamp lighting lottery executed is triggered, the non-set value in the lamp display unit 35 is corresponded. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on, but it is optional to perform the lamp lighting lottery, and without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the above-described first embodiment, the game to the special out ball opening 373 is performed. When the ball 99 is hit, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 to the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball 373 is sent to the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit by sorting the route to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and the route detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 for presenting the non-set value are in one of the two states of the lighting state and the extinguishing state. Information for specifying the non-set value is presented according to the types (numbers) of 〜 to 356. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after the specific information that can specify one non-set value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, and unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

  In addition, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are immediately turned on by winning a lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37, The lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in the lit state until the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed. Therefore, until the end of the 5R regular big hit game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information for specifying the non-set value is confirmed based on whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time. be able to. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient to specify a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and thus to specify or estimate the set values. Performance is improved.

  In the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the fact that the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball hole 373 of the clune device 37, , A condition that the player wins the lamp lighting lottery. Thereby, the difficulty of establishment of the specific condition is adjusted by the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of turning on each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that displays a number corresponding to the non-set value of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

  Note that the lamp is immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The result of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly indicated to the player on display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 of the clune device 37) is clearly indicated to the player, and FIG. As shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly shown to the player, and further, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information on the symbol display section 341 is clearly displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the game ball 99 enters the special out port 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. An image is displayed for the possibility, that is, for focusing attention on the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed by the symbol display unit 341 (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) is clearly indicated, and the game ball 99 is displayed in the special out ball 373. Even if the player misses the entry of the game ball 99, the game ball 99 is entered in the special out-of-mouth 373 by the image displayed on the symbol display section 341. It can be understood that there is a possibility that the lamp is turned on.

  Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), information on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on is specified. In the illustrated example, it is specified that the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on. As described above, the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly displayed on the symbol display unit 341, so that it is determined whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the symbol display unit 341. And the convenience is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display unit 341, during the execution of the big hit game (at least during the execution of the open / close execution mode), the information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 being turned on is continuously specified. Is done. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the individual lamp unit 35 being lit are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Until the end of the 5R regular jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends, for example, in the jackpot game (at least in the open / close execution mode), information on the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be displayed. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), an image is displayed that clearly indicates that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning. As described above, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open / close execution mode), the information on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 being turned on is continuously and clearly indicated by the symbol display unit 341. Needless to confirm, the illuminated individual lamp units 351 to 356 can be confirmed on the symbol display unit 341, thereby improving the convenience.

  The specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display unit 341 instead of the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display unit 341 relating to the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (open / close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, an ending additional image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. . For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the ending of the jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending addition image. In the example shown in FIG. 70A, it is clearly shown that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit on the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in FIG. It is specified that the sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. As described above, the turning on / off state of the lamp display unit 35 is displayed by the symbol display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game, so that the turning on / off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 illuminated up to the jackpot game can be confirmed. Therefore, convenience is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the lamp display unit 35, one in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a line (linear) is employed, but the lamp display unit 35 has the individual lamp units 351 to 356. Are not limited to those arranged in a row, but other forms may be employed. For example, a lamp display unit 35 in which individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71A, and a lamp display unit 35 arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71B are employed. You can also. Further, as the lamp display unit 35, individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be arranged in a staggered manner.

  Further, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered shape may be employed.

  Further, in this embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are possible within an applicable range.

[Summary of the Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be additionally described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each additional description and each embodiment, a description will be given with a reference numeral or the like for convenience, but the invention according to the additional description is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numeral. Not something. Further, each configuration and each processing function described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
With
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period. You. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display unit, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. is there. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy the grasp of the specific numerical information, and thus, the guess or the specification of the predetermined numerical information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix A3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to attachment A1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2 or the supplementary note A3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas where the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2 or A3, wherein the display control unit (51) displays the special information by a part of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, the special information is displayed by a part of the plurality of display areas of the display unit on which the specific information is displayed. That is, the display area of the special information is shared with the display area of the specific information. Thus, the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can be simplified.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to attachment A4, wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A5, the display means includes a plurality of light-emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6]
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to attachment A4, wherein the display control means (51) displays the specific information or the special information as an image on the display means (341).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, the specific information and the special information are displayed as images on the display unit. Therefore, there are many choices of image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the player for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information or the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to attachment A6, wherein the image display means (341) can display a variable display image in which a symbol (decorative symbol) indicating or indicating the result of the shift determination is variable.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, the specific information and the special information are displayed on an image display unit capable of displaying a symbol change display image that indicates or clearly indicates a result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A7, wherein the prescribed period is set to a period that suggests or indicates a result of the transition determination.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a predetermined period in which predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is a transition period for the transition determination. It is set to the period that suggests or indicates the result. Therefore, the specific information can be displayed together with the result of the shift determination. For example, when a change display image of a symbol indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to improve the interest in suggesting or explicitly indicating the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the specific area (373).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, the specific condition can be satisfied when the specific condition passes through the specific area, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can be more enjoyed whether a specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where a game is likely to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10]
A discharge port (373) for discharging the game board (31) on which a game ball is launched, to a rear side,
The gaming machine according to attachment A9, wherein the specific area is the outlet (373).

[Appendix A11]
The game machine further includes a plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) from which a prize ball is paid out by entering a game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls not entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to attachment A10, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to attachment A11, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10 to Supplementary Note A12, in a special game, when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through a second discharge port into which a ball can enter, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. Display contents are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not a game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to attachment A12, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) to pass therethrough.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, when a specific condition is established when the game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening in the special game can pass, the display means is displayed. The display content of the specific information to be displayed is controlled. Therefore, a game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by launching a game ball in the game area in a special game and causing the variable winning opening to win the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill, just by proceeding the game as usual in the special game. Thereby, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur because a game ball enters the second discharge port, it is avoided to play a game in the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur. Is prevented.

[Appendix A14]
A third discharge port (378) through which game balls entering the variable winning port (316) can pass, and different from the second discharge port (373);
A distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball having entered the variable winning opening (316) to one of the second outlet (373) and the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to attachment A13, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. Is provided. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game ball by the distribution means as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the estimation or specification of the specific numerical information, and furthermore, the user can enjoy the estimation or specification of the predetermined numerical information. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, wherein the special game is shifted to the special game, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, in the first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shift determining unit, in the first gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is a special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, so that specific numerical information, and thus specific numerical information, is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix A17]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15 or A16, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start point of the special game and a start point of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, the start of the predetermined period is set from the start of the special game to the start of the value-added game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started. Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A18, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix A19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A18, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and guess or estimate the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. The advantage that identification becomes easy can be obtained.

[Appendix A20]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18 or A19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-added game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the prescribed period is set to an execution period of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information when the specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means in a specified period set in the execution period of the special game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information, and thus the estimation or the specification of the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22]
The special game includes a value providing game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for providing a game value to a player, and an ending performed after the value providing game (opening / closing execution mode) ends. Have
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A21, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, since the end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with a time efficiency.

[Appendix A23]
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numerals) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21 or A22, wherein the prescribed period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, and enjoys the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display unit after the lapse of the predetermined period. Can be. Thereby, the interest of the game in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed is improved.

[Appendix A24]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, the start of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special gaming state in the first gaming state. Is done. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the first special game state in which the game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive play. As described above, the predetermined period is started with the first hit, the end is set for the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display unit after the predetermined period has elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the ability to effectively use the period in which the special game is executed and to present the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player. In addition, in the case of per-village, it is possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-villa, after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, and based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in specifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the elapse of the specific period,
The display control means (51), wherein the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the additional information A23 or the additional information A24. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. In other words, when a plurality of special games are started in a predetermined period, such as a series, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after a lapse of a specific period. Therefore, when there are a plurality of specific periods in a predetermined period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied in each specific period, and when a specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, a specific condition is determined every time the specific period elapses. The information is displayed on the display. With this, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be improved.

[Appendix A26]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-added game is executed,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the value-added game is terminated. Specific information is displayed in the ending to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-added game, and to pay attention to the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-added game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property of displaying specific information by effectively utilizing the ending of the special game, and to focus on the progress of the game in the entire special game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A27]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A26, wherein the predetermined period is after the display lottery is won.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27, the specific information is displayed on the display unit by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition under which the specific information is displayed on the display means, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is determined whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether the specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on (i), the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when a display lottery is performed as a condition under which the specific information is displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty or the variation that satisfies the specific condition (the difficulty or the variation at which the specific information is displayed). Thereby, various game properties can be provided for displaying the specific information according to the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28]
The display control means (51) sends the specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. it can. Further, it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy estimating or specifying the specific numerical information, and further, estimating or specifying the predetermined numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information that is satisfied while expecting that the specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period is increased. The progress of the game can be enjoyed by focusing on the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to attachment A28, wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A29, the display means is an information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and thus, it is also easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) displays the number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period on the plurality of display areas of the information display means. The gaming machine according to A29.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display unit has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to attachment A30, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the individual information in a corresponding relationship among the specific information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A31, since the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. Becomes possible. Thereby, when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy the identification or estimation of the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed.

[Appendix A32]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30 or A31, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A32, the information display means includes a plurality of light-emitting areas. Such an information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30 or A31, wherein the information display unit (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A33, since the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated on the information display means, there are many options of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Thereby, the playability for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a fluctuating display image in which a design (decorative design) that suggests or indicates the result of the transition determination is fluctuated and displayed. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A34, the specific image is displayed on an image display unit that can display a symbol change display image that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A29 to A34, wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in association with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced game knowledge. Alternatively, the guess can be easily enjoyed.

[Appendix A36]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351-356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to attachment A29, wherein the specific information is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plural types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit on which specific information is displayed for each specific numerical information is defined. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display unit on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. Thereby, the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A37]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A36, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A37, the individual display unit is controlled to one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily specified by the mode of the individual display unit. Thereby, the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36 or A37, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or zigzag.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A36 to A38, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a lamp group.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes A38 and A39, it is possible to easily and inexpensively form information display means.

[Appendix A40]
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further comprising
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, based on the display order determined by the display order determining means (51) in the specified period, 35. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the specific information is displayed on the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A40, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied is determined. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed by satisfying the predetermined condition in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being stabilized. Thereby, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to attachment A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A41, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the display order in which the display unit displays the specific information is determined. By the way, the power supply of a gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of a game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, so that the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days, and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to attachment A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from being monotonized.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to attachment A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A43, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thus, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A44]
The gaming machine according to attachment A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A44, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means when the special game is started is determined. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A45]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to attachment A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-added game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A45, when the value-added game is started, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-added game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A46]
Display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) in a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. Operating means (21) operated by a player;
When a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341), a second display control means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A46, the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means in a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed in the specified period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten, or when the player is changed, the player should check the display contents in the special period. Can be. As a result, the player can specify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and determine whether or not to play a game in the gaming machine according to the specification or guess. Can be determined.

[Appendix A47]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying a result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
The gaming machine according to attachment A46, wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A47, the special period in which the display content can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully take time to check the display content at his own pace and determine whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine without being restricted by time.

[Appendix A48]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the specified periods different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A46 or A47, wherein at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49]
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player in the special period by the player from the display contents of the plurality of specific information in the special period. The gaming machine according to attachment A48, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to attachment A49, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A48 to Supplementary Note A50, at least one of the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by himself / herself with the intention of the player. This makes it possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at a time, so that the presentation contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A46 to A50, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to attachment A51, wherein the second display means (341) is a fluctuating display image display means for fluctuating and displaying a symbol (decorative symbol) indicating or indicating the result of the shift determination.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A51 and Supplementary Note A52 includes first display means displayed in a specified period and second display means displayed in a special period, and different display means in each of the specified period and the special period. The specific information is displayed. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display unit is a variable display image display unit, it is possible to prevent an image (for example, an image effect) displayed on the variable display image display unit from being disturbed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. Generally, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented to the variable display image display means. Further, the variable display image display means may be used for performing various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is displayed in a variable manner by the same operation as that for performing various settings. The image can be presented on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A8, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A53, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix A54]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A53, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A54, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A54 is a conventional slot machine in which information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display means. And different.

[Appendix A55]
Display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
A selection display order storage unit (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection unit (51);
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of pieces of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A53, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A55, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders defining the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selectivity thereof, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is made monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A56]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to attachment A55, wherein the display order selecting means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A56, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since a plurality of display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to attachment A56, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) selected by the display order selecting means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A57, the specific display order can be easily selected, and the specific display order can be hardly selected. That is, unlike the case where the probability that all display orders are selected is the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of being a high set value and the likelihood of being a low set value.

[Appendix A58]
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including the order,
In the first display order, the selection ratio (selection rate) selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A57, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A58, among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information, the first display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability is the lowest Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so that the most disadvantageous determination probability for the player and the more advantageous for the player until the last specific information is displayed. The possibility of the advantage determination probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the player has the most disadvantageous determination probability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the game machine from being terminated early, and to reduce the operating rate of the game machine. Reduction can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59]
The specific information is first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the most probable advantage determination probability,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first specific information and the second specific information is the lower two.
In the second display order, the probability (selection rate) selection rate selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A57, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A59, the second display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability determination advantage probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low is lower. Easy to select. For this reason, similarly to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A58, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the player has the most disadvantageous determination probability, and that the game with the gaming machine is terminated early. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest advantage determination probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous for the player but also the advantage determination probability that the player has the advantage. As described above, since the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical information corresponding to the disadvantage determination probability that is disadvantageous for the player and the advantage determination probability that the player has the advantage are low in priority, the advantage for the player conflicts. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities is the last, the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be improved.

[Appendix A60]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the probability,
In the third display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A57.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A60, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability is set to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selectivity of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set higher. By setting the selectivity of the third display order to be high as described above, a possibility that the advantage determination probability is higher than the actual first advantage determination probability immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability is given to the player. Can be expected. This makes it possible to guess and enjoy the specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high until immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability.

[Appendix A61]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantage determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability higher than the probability,
In the fourth display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A57.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A61, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability is set to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selectivity of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set higher. Since the selectivity of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as non-display specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is finally recognized as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical information). The pleasure of being improved.

[Appendix A62]
The display device according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A3, further including a display restriction unit (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display unit (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A62, display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted in a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game satisfying the specific condition for displaying the specific information. Thus, it is possible to prevent another player from piggybacking on a privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying a result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A62, wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A63, the display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, during the period of the standby state, the display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted, so that another player can piggyback on the privilege obtained by the previous player and specify or infer the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent the user from obtaining specific information.

[Appendix A64]
The display restricting means (51) restricts display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A62 or A63.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A64, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display unit in the specified period is restricted. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the display history of the specific information in the past is also restricted in other periods. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, and therefore, based on the display history, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player and specifies the specific numerical information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for estimation.

[Appendix A65]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numerals) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. When a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of pieces of specific information (numbers) are displayed in the first display order different from the first display order by the display unit (35, 39. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A3, wherein the game machine displays the information on the game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A65, when the first specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in a first display order, and when the second specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed. The information (number) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from knowing early that the advantage determination probability is low when the case corresponds to the case where the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantage determination probability is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix A66]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A65, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A66, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage unit, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage unit. Including that information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders defining a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selecting means (51) to perform
A selection display order storage unit (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection unit (51);
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of pieces of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A65 or A66, which is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A67, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders defining the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selectivity thereof, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is made monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A68]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to attachment A67, wherein the display order selecting means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A68, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since a plurality of display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69]
Second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numerals) indicating the predetermined numerical information on second display means (45);
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility of the player is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A69, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means ( At 45), predetermined information is displayed. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is limited, so that the predetermined numerical value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the gaming hall side can grasp the predetermined information. This allows the gaming hall to check the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside the business hours, and to change the predetermined numerical information when changing the predetermined numerical information. Can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70]
It further comprises a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to attachment A69, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on a back side of the gaming board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A70, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. Is displayed on the second display means provided in the. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to attachment A70, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A71, the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. This makes it possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72]
The second display control means (41)
Controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
Controlling the display from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A70 or supplementary note A71, wherein when the second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A72, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed are selected by an operation on a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. it can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means even if the game board is opened when a jamming or the like occurs in the game machine. Can be reliably prevented from being grasped.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
With
The specific condition can be satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, since a specific condition can be satisfied when the specific condition passes, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can be more enjoyed whether a specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game is likely to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix B3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B2 or the supplementary note B3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
A discharge port (373) for discharging the game board (31) on which a game ball is launched, to a rear side,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the specific area is the outlet (373).

[Appendix B5]
The game machine further includes a plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) from which a prize ball is paid out by entering a game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls not entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to attachment B4, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6]
The gaming machine according to attachment B5, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B4 to Supplementary Note B6, in a special game, when a specific condition is established when a game ball passes through a second discharge port into which a ball can enter, special information displayed on a display unit is displayed. Display contents are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not a game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to attachment B6, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball having passed through the variable winning port (316) to pass therethrough.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, when a specific condition is established when the game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening in the special game can pass, the display means is displayed. The display content of the specific information to be displayed is controlled. Therefore, a game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by launching a game ball in the game area in a special game and causing the variable winning opening to win the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill, just by proceeding the game as usual in the special game. Thereby, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur because a game ball enters the second discharge port, it is avoided to play a game in the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur. Is prevented.

[Appendix B8]
A third discharge port (378) through which game balls entering the variable winning port (316) can pass, and different from the second discharge port (373);
A distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball having entered the variable winning opening (316) to one of the second outlet (373) and the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to attachment B7, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. Is provided. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game ball by the distribution means as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B8, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment B9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix B10]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B9, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for denying a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix C1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied, and when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is set. Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerical value) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than
With
In the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine wherein the beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information, and further the estimation or the specification of the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, wherein the gaming machine can be displayed on means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) converts the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, wherein the gaming machine can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C2 or the supplementary note C3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, from the additional notes C1 to C3. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C4, in the first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shift determining unit, in the first gaming state, which is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is the special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, so that specific numerical information, and thus specific numerical information, is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C4, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start point of the special game and a start point of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C5, the beginning of the predetermined period is set from the start of the special game to the start of the value-added game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started. Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C5, wherein an end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to claim C6, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and guess or estimate the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. The advantage that identification becomes easy can be obtained.

[Appendix C8]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C6 or supplementary note C7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix C9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C8, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix C10]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C9, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C10, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix D1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
With
In the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The gaming machine, wherein the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, when specific conditions are satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period set as a special game execution period. Thereby, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information, and thus the estimation or the specification of the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein the gaming machine can be displayed on a means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) converts the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein the gaming machine can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2 or Supplementary Note D3, not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D4]
The special game includes a value providing game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for providing a game value to a player, and an ending performed after the value providing game (opening / closing execution mode) ends. Have
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D3, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, since the end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with a time efficiency.

[Appendix D5]
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numerals) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D4, wherein the prescribed period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, and enjoys the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display unit after the lapse of the predetermined period. Can be. Thereby, the interest of the game in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed is improved.

[Appendix D6]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. A gaming machine according to attachment D5, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, the start of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special gaming state in the first gaming state. Is done. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the first special game state in which the game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive play. As described above, the predetermined period is started with the first hit, the end is set for the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display unit after the predetermined period has elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the ability to effectively use the period in which the special game is executed and to present the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player. In addition, in the case of per-village, it is possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-villa, after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, and based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in specifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the elapse of the specific period,
The display control unit (51), wherein the specific information is displayed on the display unit (35, 39, 341) when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the supplementary note D5 or the supplementary note D6. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. In other words, when a plurality of special games are started in a predetermined period, such as a series, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after a lapse of a specific period. Therefore, when there are a plurality of specific periods in a predetermined period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied in each specific period, and when a specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, a specific condition is determined every time the specific period elapses. The information is displayed on the display. With this, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be improved.

[Appendix D8]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-added game is executed,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note D7, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the value-added game is terminated. Specific information is displayed in the ending to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-added game, and to pay attention to the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-added game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property of displaying specific information by effectively utilizing the ending of the special game, and to focus on the progress of the game in the entire special game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix D9]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined period is after winning the display lottery.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D9, the specific information is displayed on the display unit by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition under which the specific information is displayed on the display means, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is determined whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether the specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on (i), the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when a display lottery is performed as a condition under which the specific information is displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty or the variation that satisfies the specific condition (the difficulty or the variation at which the specific information is displayed). Thereby, various game properties can be provided for displaying the specific information according to the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D9, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix D11]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note D10, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, at least in the specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the plurality of types of numerical information Display control means (51) for causing display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerals) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information,
With
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. . Further, it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy estimating or specifying the specific numerical information, and further, estimating or specifying the predetermined numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, because the special information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period, the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period is expected while expecting that many specific conditions are satisfied. Pay attention to and can enjoy the progress of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein there is a game machine.

[Appendix E3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note E2 or the supplementary note E3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4]
The game according to any one of Supplementary notes E1 to E3, wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E4, the display means is an information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and thus, it is also easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) displays the number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period on the plurality of display areas of the information display means. The gaming machine according to E4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E5, the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display unit has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to attachment E5, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the individual information corresponding to the specific information in a corresponding relationship.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E6, since the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. Becomes possible. Thereby, when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy the identification or estimation of the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to attachment E5 or E6, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E7, the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such an information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E5 or E6, wherein the information display unit (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E8, since the specific numerical value information can be specified or guessed on the information display unit, the specific image can be displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Thereby, the playability for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E9]
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a fluctuating display image in which a design (decorative design) that suggests or indicates the result of the shift determination is fluctuated and displayed, the additional information E8 is provided. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9, the specific image is displayed on an image display unit capable of displaying a symbol change display image that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E5 to E9, wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in association with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced game knowledge. Alternatively, the guess can be easily enjoyed.

[Appendix E11]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351-356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to attachment E4, wherein the specific information is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E11, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit on which specific information is displayed for each specific numerical information is defined. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display unit on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. Thereby, the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E12]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E11, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, the individual display unit is controlled to one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily specified by the mode of the individual display unit. Thereby, the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note E11 or E12, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered shape.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E11 to E13, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a lamp group.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E13 and E14, the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E14, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E15, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the estimation or specification of the specific numerical information, and furthermore, the user can enjoy the estimation or specification of the predetermined numerical information. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, wherein the special game is shifted to the special game. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E16, in a first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shifting determining means, in a first gaming state lower than the second gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is a special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, and therefore, specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix E17]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note E15 or E16, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start point of the special game and a start point of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E17, since the beginning of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-added game, whether at least a specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E15 to E17, wherein an end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E18, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E18, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information for specifying the specific numerical information, and the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. Can be easily estimated or specified.

[Appendix E20]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E18 or E19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E20, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix E21]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E1 to E20, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E21, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix E22]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E21, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E22, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E22 is a conventional slot machine in which information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix F1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information (non-set value Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerals) indicating
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
With
The display control means (51), when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, based on the display order determined by the display order determining means (51) in the specified period. (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information,
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied is determined. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed by satisfying the predetermined condition in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being stabilized. Thereby, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein:

[Appendix F3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note F2 or the supplementary note F3, not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, the display order in which the display unit displays the specific information is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power supply of a gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of a game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, so that the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days, and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from being monotonized.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the display order in which the display unit displays the specific information is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thus, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of the special game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F8]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-added game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, when the value-added game is started, the display order in which the display unit displays the specific information is determined. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-added game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F9]
Display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
A selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Further comprising
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of pieces of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F8, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that specify the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selectivity thereof, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is made monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix F10]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F9, wherein the display order selecting means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since a plurality of display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F10, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the estimation or specification of the specific numerical information, and furthermore, the user can enjoy the estimation or specification of the predetermined numerical information. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted to when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, wherein the special game is shifted to the special game. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, in the first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shift determining unit in the first gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is a special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, and therefore, specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix F13]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11 or F12, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F13, since the beginning of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-added game, whether at least a specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F11 to F13, wherein an end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment F14, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix F15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and guess or estimate the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. The advantage that identification becomes easy can be obtained.

[Appendix F16]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14 or F15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix F17]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F16, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F17, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix F18]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F17, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the supplementary note F18 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. First display control means (51) for causing the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerals);
Display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) in a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. Operating means (21) operated by a player;
When a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341), a second display control means (51),
With
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means in a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed in the specified period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten, or when the player is changed, the player should check the display contents in the special period. Can be. As a result, the player can specify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and determine whether or not to play a game in the gaming machine according to the specification or guess. Can be determined.

[Appendix G2]
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

[Appendix G3]
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G2 or the supplementary note G3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. . Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also can display the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. The specific numerical information can be estimated based on the special information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G4]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying a result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, the special period in which the display content can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully take time to check the display content at his own pace and determine whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine without being restricted by time.

[Appendix G5]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the specified periods different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G4, wherein at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G6]
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player in the special period by the player from the display contents of the plurality of specific information in the special period. The gaming machine according to attachment G5, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to attachment G5, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G5 to Supplementary Note G7, at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by himself / herself with the intention of the player. This makes it possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at a time, so that the presentation contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G7, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9]
The gaming machine according to attachment G8, wherein the second display means (341) is a fluctuating display image displaying means for fluctuating and displaying a symbol (decorative symbol) indicating or indicating the result of the shift determination.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8 and Supplementary Note G9 includes a first display unit that is displayed in a specified period and a second display unit that is displayed in a special period, and different display units are used in each of the specified period and the special period. The specific information is displayed. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display unit is a variable display image display unit, it is possible to prevent an image (for example, an image effect) displayed on the variable display image display unit from being disturbed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. Generally, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented to the variable display image display means. Further, the variable display image display means may be used for performing various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is displayed in a variable manner by the same operation as that for performing various settings. The image can be presented on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G9, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix G11]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G10, wherein the game machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G11, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G11 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix H1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non- Display control means (51) for displaying on the display means (35, 39, 341) each of a plurality of specific information (numerals) indicating the set value
With
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order,
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix H2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, wherein

[Appendix H3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H2 or the supplementary note H3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
Display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
A selection display order storage unit (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection unit (51);
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of pieces of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H3, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that specify the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selectivity thereof, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is made monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H5]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to claim H4, wherein the one of the plurality of display orders is selected based on the predetermined numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since a plurality of display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to attachment H5, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) selected by the display order selecting means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, it is possible to easily select a specific display order, and to make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where the probability that all display orders are selected is the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of being a high set value and the likelihood of being a low set value.

[Appendix H7]
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including the order,
In the first display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information, the first display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability is the lowest Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so that the most disadvantageous determination probability for the player and the more advantageous for the player until the last specific information is displayed. The possibility of the advantage determination probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the player has the most disadvantageous determination probability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the game machine from being terminated early, and to reduce the operating rate of the game machine. Reduction can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8]
The specific information is first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the most probable advantage determination probability,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first specific information and the second specific information is the lower two.
In the second display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8, among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability determination probability is lower. Easy to select. For this reason, similarly to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has the most disadvantageous determination probability, and that the game in the gaming machine is terminated early. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest advantage determination probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous for the player but also the advantage determination probability that the player has the advantage. As described above, since the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical information corresponding to the disadvantage determination probability that is disadvantageous for the player and the advantage determination probability that the player has the advantage are low in priority, the advantage for the player conflicts. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities is the last, the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be improved.

[Appendix H9]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the probability,
In the third display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability is set to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selectivity of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set higher. By setting the selectivity of the third display order to be high as described above, a possibility that the advantage determination probability is higher than the actual first advantage determination probability immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability is given to the player. Can be expected. This makes it possible to guess and enjoy the specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high until immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability.

[Appendix H10]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantage determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability higher than the probability,
In the fourth display order, the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than in the display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability is set to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selectivity of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set higher. Since the selectivity of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as non-display specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is finally recognized as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical information). The pleasure of being improved.

[Supplementary Note H11]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H10, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the estimation or specification of the specific numerical information, and furthermore, the user can enjoy the estimation or specification of the predetermined numerical information. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Supplementary Note H12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted to when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, wherein the special game is shifted to the special game. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12, in a first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shifting determining unit, in a first gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is a special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, so that specific numerical information, and thus specific numerical information, is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Supplementary Note H13]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11 or H12, wherein the beginning of the predetermined period is set between a start point of the special game and a start point of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, since the beginning of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-added game, whether at least a specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H11 to H13, wherein an end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment H14, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix H15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H14, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and guess or estimate the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. The advantage that identification becomes easy can be obtained.

[Appendix H16]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14 or H15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-added game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H16, since the end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix H17]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H15, characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix I1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
A display restricting unit (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display unit (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period;
With
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game satisfying the specific condition for displaying the specific information. Thus, it is possible to prevent another player from piggybacking on a privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note I1, characterized in that:

[Appendix I3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note I1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I2 or the supplementary note I3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I4]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying a result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I3, wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I4, display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted during a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, during the period of the standby state, the display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted, so that another player can piggyback on the privilege obtained by the previous player and specify or infer the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent the user from obtaining specific information.

[Appendix I5]
The display restricting means (51) restricts display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, in a period other than the prescribed period, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means in the prescribed period is restricted. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the display history of the specific information in the past is also restricted in other periods. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, and therefore, based on the display history, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player and specifies the specific numerical information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for estimation.

[Appendix I6]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I5, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I6, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix I7]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I6, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix J1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types are specified in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control (35, 39, 341) for displaying a plurality of specific information (numerical values) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information items Means (51);
With
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numerals) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, When the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numerals) is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order,
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when the first specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in a first display order, and when the second specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed. The information (number) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from knowing early that the advantage determination probability is low when the case corresponds to the case where the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantage determination probability is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix J2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, wherein

[Appendix J3]
The display control unit (51) may cause the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J2 or Supplementary Note J3, not only the specific information but also special information not indicating a plurality of types of numerical information or special information indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix J4]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J3, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J4, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage unit, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical value is stored in the numerical information storage unit. Including that information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders defining a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selecting means (51) to perform
A selection display order storage unit (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection unit (51);
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of pieces of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J4, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J5, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders defining a display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selectivity thereof, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is made monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix J6]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to attachment J5, wherein the display order selecting means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J6, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since a plurality of display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J6, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J7, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the estimation or specification of the specific numerical information, and furthermore, the user can enjoy the estimation or specification of the predetermined numerical information. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the user can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, wherein the special game is shifted to the special game. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, in a first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the shifting determining unit, in a first gaming state lower than the second gaming state, the result of the shifting determination is a special gaming state. Is set to the special game to be shifted to when the game is to be shifted to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of a single hit or a series of villas, and therefore, specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for one initial hit. Opportunities are guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix J9]
The special game has a value giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J7 or J8, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, the beginning of the predetermined period is set from the start of the special game to the start of the value-added game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-added game is started. Pay attention to whether or not to enjoy the game.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J7 to J9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the shift determination is not notified. For this reason, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the beginning of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease the interest in the game, is improved.

[Appendix J11]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Usually a jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the shift determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than in the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is reported. A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) which is shifted to a second game state (high probability mode).
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J11, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to transition to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single hit in which the initial winning is shifted to the first special gaming state, the execution is performed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the shift determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, that is, in the case of the extended play where the initial hit is shifted to the second special game state, the transition to the second special game state is performed. If the result of the shift determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without terminating the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period is ended in the special game. In other words, in the extended game in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the extended game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the series, the predetermined period is longer than the single special game, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is larger in a per-village than in a single shot. Become. With this, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating the specific numerical information, and guess or estimate the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. The advantage that identification becomes easy can be obtained.

[Appendix J12]
The special game has a value-giving game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-giving game ends.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10 or J11, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, no game value is assigned or the result of the shift determination is not notified. Therefore, a period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J12, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, Utilizing the blank period for the player, specific information indicating specific numerical information can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time efficient manner.

[Appendix J13]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J12, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J13, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix J14]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J13, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J14, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J14 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high setting value such as a maximum setting value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

[Appendix K1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probabilities);
Selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
In a case where a specific condition is satisfied, at least a specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. First display control means (51) for causing the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerals);
Second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numerals) indicating the predetermined numerical information on the second display means (45);
With
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility of the player is restricted,
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means ( At 45), predetermined information is displayed. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is limited, so that the predetermined numerical value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the gaming hall side can grasp the predetermined information. This allows the gaming hall to check the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside the business hours, and to change the predetermined numerical information when changing the predetermined numerical information. Can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2]
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) not indicating the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing the following.

[Appendix K3]
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note K2 or the supplementary note K3, not only the specific information but also the special information not indicating the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information indicating a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. . Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. To infer specific numerical information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K4]
It further comprises a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K3, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on a back side of the game board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K4, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. Is displayed on the second display means provided in the. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to attachment K4, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K5, a second display unit is provided on a back surface side of a game board fixed to a frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. This makes it possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6]
The second display control means (41)
Controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
Controlling the display from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K4 or K5, wherein when the second operation is performed on the specific operation unit (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K6, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed are selected by an operation on a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. it can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means even if the game board is opened when a jamming or the like occurs in the game machine. Can be reliably prevented from being grasped.

[Appendix K7]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes K11 to K6, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K7, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a prescribed period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is easy, an order in which narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information is difficult, an order in which it is easy to determine the degree of the advantage determination probability is high, and reverse. It is possible to set the order in which it is difficult to determine the height. As described above, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be prevented from being monotonized.

[Appendix K8]
The display control means (51), when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a specified number, causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to attachment K7, characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K8, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display unit in the predetermined display order in the specified period. As described above, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K8 is a conventional slot machine that does not present information for negating a high set value such as a maximum set value in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on a display unit. And different.

10: gaming machine 31: gaming board 316: variable winning opening 341: symbol display unit 35: lamp display unit 351: first individual lamp unit 352: second individual lamp unit 353: third individual lamp unit 354: fourth individual lamp Unit 355: Fifth individual ramp unit 356: Sixth individual ramp unit 37: Crune device 373: Special out ball port 38: Game ball retaining unit 381: Retaining lane 383: Stopper unit 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display Units A to G: segment 4: main control unit 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a shift determination unit that determines whether to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
Storage means for storing each numerical information corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities,
Selecting means for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information of at least the plurality of types of numerical information is displayed in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means for displaying
With
In the gaming machine, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display during the specified period.

Images